Home

GenTran Webcam 5.1 User's Manual

1. Ifyes select the Always Current check box Ifno clear the Always Current check box and move the Date to slide bar to the date and time you want to use Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Interchanges Filtering the Display of Interchanges Step Action Do you want to filter the display of interchanges by partner Ifyes select the partners that you want displayed from the Partner list lists all partner profiles on your system Note The default display is all partners but you can click partner profiles to clear them and change the display Alternately you can click Unselect All Partners to deselect all partner profiles You can then click one or more profiles to select them At least one partner must be selected Ifno continue with step 7 Which direction do you want to filter the interchange Default The default display is both inbound and outbound interchanges Clear the Inbound or Outbound check box to clear the direction Note At least one of the Direction check boxes must be selected Click OK System response The system filters the interchange display based on the criteria you selected Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Documents within Interchanges Using Interchanges 7 14 Viewing Documents wi
2. 0 cece cnet e 7 3 Interchange Filter Dialog Box 0 0 cect e 7 8 Viewing Interchanges 0 ccc cette teen rn 7 10 Filtering the Display of Interchanges 0 c ccc eens 7 12 Viewing Documents within Interchanges 000 cece cee eens 7 14 Attaching Interchanges toa Partner 2 0 cece eee ees 7 16 Resending Interchanges 0 0 0 c cece ent e nee eens 7 18 Manually Acknowledging an Interchange Group or Document 7 20 Using Acknowledgements OVEIVIEW 303s oh ei EOS ee bee ee bead is wets RES 8 2 Defining Inbound Acknowledgement Criteria llle eee 8 3 Defining Outbound Acknowledgement Criteria 00 ce eee eee eee 8 6 Manually Acknowledging Documents 0 0 cece eee een eens 8 10 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Special Considerations for EDIFACT Acknowledgements Ls 8 11 Checking for Overdue Acknowledgements 0 00 ce cece eese 8 12 Chapter9 Using Tracking P OVEIVIEW Llueelcecrpeebeerst eM SeMREBRDRAUPEDTPEN MER IHE EERBPR DC parce 9 2 Tracking Inbound Information 00 00 cece eee eens 9 3 Tracking Outbound Information 0 0 000 ccc teens 9 6 Viewing and Printing Data Audit Information 0 0 c eee eee eee 9 9 Viewing and Printing Tracking Information 0 0 cece eee eee eee 9 10 Chapter 1
3. Creating Documents Using Documents Step Action 3 Select the appropriate partner transaction set combination from the list and click OK System response The system displays the translation object for the selected combination as shown below Document Editor ANSI X12 Invoice 810 Pet Zone Bis Be e 7 o ANSI X12 Invoice 810 Pet Zone Continued on next page f Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Creating Documents Step Action Type all the required data items into the boxes on the document translation object Note If the document contains a looping structure lower level detail records such as line items the input translation object contains a list as shown below Document Editor ANSI X12 Invoice 810 Pet Zone File Edit Group View Window Help ajaj Ese su x p ANSI X12 Invoice 810 Pet Zone Line Items Number Of Line Items Total Invoice Amount For Help press F1 NUM To access items in a list highlight the first entry and click New System response The system displays the list box as shown below Line Items olx wwe meme UOM sz Price Description Date Shipped 0 Transport Method z Carrier Code Enter the data for the item Notes To enter a second or subsequ
4. Importa file through the process control system using a timed or polled session This writes all valid documents to the database with a compliant status and locates the documents in the Out Documents Invalid documents are marked with a non compliant status and located in the Out Documents Import an application file Documents that you import manually are located in the Workspace Use the Document Editor to enter documents if there is an appropriate data entry translation object registered with Gentran Server These documents are located in the Workspace If you import a file the translator checks the import definitions from the system configuration to match the file name with a system import translation object The translator uses the system import translation object to determine which trading relationship established in Partner Editor corresponds to each document in the application file so the system knows which import map to use to process the document After the translator determines which trading relationship corresponds with a document in the file it ascertains which import translation object is specified in that relationship The translator uses the import translation object to compliance check the document If the document is compliant valid it is marked OK If the document is not compliant invalid it is marked NotOK If there is another document remaining in the import file
5. ReconcileOverdue Find Finds the appropriate documents based on the criteria you selected and displays them in the Search Results Dialog Box Cancel Exits the dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 em Mailbox Archive Definition Dialog Box Using Archive and Restore 10 22 Mailbox Archive Definition Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Mailbox Archive Definition dialog box Mailbox Archive Definition x Name FO Delete Data After Archive Selection Criteria Mailbox Location Days Old Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Mailbox Archive Definition dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Name Specify the name of the archive definition file Note This name must be unique Delete Data After Tell the system to remove the message data after Archive archiving it Add Accesses the Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box and enables you to define new archive criteria Edit Accesses the Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box for the selected mailbox criteria and enables you to modify the archive criteria Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Mailbox Archive Definition Dialog Box 10 23
6. 0 00 cece rh 3 105 Deleting Entries ina Partner Table 2 0 0 cece eee eens 3 106 Deleting Partner Tables 2 0 eect tenes 3 107 Exporting Partner Tables 2 0 cece ence ees 3 108 Importing Partner Tables 2 0c ccc ee 3 111 Using Partner Locations 21 2 4 ua rr aro 3 113 HE uso eT 3 113 Location Select Dialog Box 1 1 0 cece es 3 114 Location Entry Dialog Box 0 ccc e 3 115 Creating Partner Locations 3 117 Editing Partner Locations 0 cece cee e 3 118 Delete Partner Locations 2 0 0c cece e 3 119 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide iii Chapter 4 Using Documents k Tntrod ction Lise RR RF siei sanheta a a a a CRUS 4 3 Document Browsers amp 4 cced a adu RR ERR DR ERE RR RA CR RR ERR C 4 4 Accessing the Document Browsers 00 ccc tee e eens 4 4 In Documents Browser 0 00 res 4 6 In Documents Browser 0 cece eee rreren 4 8 In Drawer Browser 2 12120 enert RIED M Ru e baee ddd lade ae 4 10 Workspace Browser 0 eh rn 4 12 Out Documents Browser 0 0 eee eee hm 4 14 Out Documents Browser 0 0 0 eee ete eens 4 16 Out Drawer Browser 0 00 cee s 4 17 Processing Browser 0 0 0 cece eect m n en neee 4 19 Related Dial g Boxes ou uris o n e eC aC bee n CEA CY ae t mess o t pu
7. Exit Exits the Outbound Group Select dialog box New Displays the Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box which allows you to create a new group Edit Displays the Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected group Delete Removes the selected group from the system Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box Introduction The Outbound Group Entry dialog box is used to specify a new functional group definition Diagram The following illustrates the Outbound Group Entry dialog box with the Advanced options displayed Outbound Group Entry PETZONE x Description Save Standard Exit Version Envelope Functional Group ID Last Used Group Control Number Expect Acknowledgement o Hours Overdue fi Transaction Control Numbers Sequence From Group Format Normal Last Used onto fiber 573 p 374 E 3 ers Group Transl Obj as Build Template ANSI Acknowledge Transl Obj Parts and The following lists the parts of the Outbound Group Entry dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Description Specify the name of the functional group description Standard Displays the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship definition Continued on next page Ge
8. Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Version 5 1 Sterling Commerce An IBM Company 4232 510 USER15 0000 Copyright Notice Gentran Server for Windows Copyright 1995 2005 Sterling Commerce Inc ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Sterling Commerce Software Trade Secret Notice THE GENTRAN SERVER FOR WINDOWS SOFTWARE STERLING COMMERCE SOFTWARE IS THE CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET PROPERTY OF STERLING COMMERCE INC ITS AFFILIATED COMPANIES OR ITS OR THEIR LICENSORS AND IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF A LICENSE AGREEMENT NO DUPLICATION OR DISCLOSURE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION RESTRICTED RIGHTS This documentation the Sterling Commerce Software it describes and the information and know how they contain constitute the proprietary confidential and valuable trade secret information of Sterling Commerce Inc its affiliated companies or its or their licensors and may not be used for any unauthorized purpose or disclosed to others without the prior written permission of the applicable Sterling Commerce entity This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software that it describes have been provided pursuant to a license agreement that contains prohibitions against and or restrictions on their copying modification and use Duplication in whole or in part if and when permitted shall bear this notice and the Sterling Commerce Inc copyright notice As and when provided to any governmental entity governme
9. Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Archive and Restore Creating an Archive Definition 10 37 Step Action Complete the appropriate parameters References See the following for more information Interchange Selection Criteria Dialog Box on page 10 13 Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box on page 10 24 External Data Selection Criteria Dialog Box on page 10 30 Note All elements on the Selection Criteria dialog boxes are automatically set to the defaults which results in the archival of all data Click Save System response The system exits the Selection Criteria dialog box Do you want to create additional archive criteria Ifyes repeat Steps 6 through 8 Ifno continue with the next step 10 Click Save on the appropriate Archive Definition dialog box System response The system creates an archive definition file that contains the archive parameters The definition file is stored with an ARD extension 11 Use this table to determine your next step IF you want to THEN edit the archive criteria select the appropriate item on the appropriate Archive Definition dialog box and click Edit delete archive criteria select the appropriate item on the appropriate Archive Definition dialog box and click Delete Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Ser
10. Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Editing Sessions mess 11 13 Step Action 6 Do you want to specify a limit in minutes on how long this command should process before the system writes a message to the Audit Log Ifyes select the check box and type the number of minutes in the box Ifno continue with the next step 7 After you choose a command additional boxes may be displayed in the Command Specification section of the dialog box Complete these boxes with the appropriate values 8 If you want to apply a condition to the command select a condition from the Condition list 9 After you choose a condition the system displays two additional boxes in the Condition section of the dialog box Complete these boxes with the appropriate values Note If you selected the If file Below Exists condition you can use a wildcard to specify the name of the file for which you want the system to check 10 When you specify conditional execution you must also select True or False from the Result list Notes Ifyou select True you are indicating that the command should only be executed if there are documents in the specific location or if the file is present Ifyou select False you are indicating that the command should be executed only if there are no documents in the specific locati
11. Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Table Export File Build Dialog Box Table Export File Build Dialog Box Introduction The Table Export function allows you to export partner cross reference and lookup tables to a sequential file This allows you to define a table for one trading partner and copy that table to another partner profile Notes You can only export Gentran Server partner tables The default file extension for cross reference tables is xrf The default file extension for lookup tables is lkp Diagram The following illustrates the Table Export File Build dialog box Table Export File Build 21 xi Save in a Partners z f e Filename PETZONEPRODCODE Ikp 3 Save as type Export Files Ikp J Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Table Export File Build dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Save in Select the folder where you want to save the file Displays the current folder File name Specify the name of the file to be exported Save as type Select the type of file Note The default file extension for cross reference tables is xrf and for lookup tables is lkp Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Table Export File Build Dialog Box 3 100 Using Partners Pa
12. Ifyes clear the No Date Time Checking check box and proceed with step 4 Use the Date From slide bar to select the beginning of the date range from which the system should filter the display of interchanges Do you want the end date for the date range to always be the current system date and time Ifno deselect the Always Current check box and move the Date To slide bar to the end of the date range Ifyes select the Always Current check box Do you want to filter the display of restored interchanges by partner Ifo continue with step 7 Ifyes select the partners that you want displayed from the Partner list which contains a list of all the partner profiles on your system Note The default display is all partners but you can click partner profiles to unselect them and change the display Alternately you can click Unselect All Partners to clear all the partner profiles You can then click one or more profiles to select them At least one partner must be selected Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Filtering the Display of Restored Interchanges Using Archive and Restore 10 54 Step Action Which direction do you want to filter the interchange Default The default display is both inbound and outbound interchanges Click the Inbound or Outbound check box to clear the direction Note
13. Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System User for which you want to delete a table entry Click Tables System Response The system displays the Partner Tables Dialog Box Select the table you want to modify Click Edit System response The system displays either the CrossRef Select Dialog Box or Lookup Select Dialog Box depending on the type of table Select the item you want to modify Click Delete System response The system displays the Confirm Delete dialog box Click Yes to complete the deletion System response The system returns to either the CrossRef Select Dialog Box or Lookup Select Dialog Box depending on the type of table Click Exit System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Deleting Partner Tables 3 107 Deleting Partner Tables Procedure To delete a partner table complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box 2 Select the partner profile for which you want to delete a table Click Tables System Response The system displays the Part
14. Document Name i RefData Partner o H Document Type OoOO O Application Field 1 Application Field 2 ee Application Field 3 Application Field 4 I Application Field 5 Application Field B i Parts and The following lists the document search criteria and their descriptions functions Criteria Description Document Name Searches for documents with the specified user assigned document name RefData Searches for documents with the specified reference data assigned by the translation object designer Partner Searches for documents with the selected partner ID identifies the partner for from whom the document was generated or received Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Document Search Dialog Box 4 28 Using Documents Criteria Description Document Type Searches for documents of the specified EDI type Example 810 identifies an invoice Application Field 1 Searches for documents with the specified value in Application Field 1 Application Field 2 Searches for documents with the specified value in Application Field 2 Application Field 3 Searches for documents with the specified value in Application Field 3 Application Field 4 Searches for documents with the specified value in Application Field 4 Application Field 5 Searches
15. MBlImport Send Export Days old Specify the age in days of the external data files to be archived Archive Files Indicate that the external data files will be archived Save Saves the selection criteria and exits the External Data Selection Criteria dialog box Cancel Exits the External Data Selection Criteria dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore External Data Search Dialog Box 10 31 External Data Search Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the External Data Search dialog box External Data Search Action Taken All B Ecion Pertonned Benyeer Original Filename External Data Key 2000 02 14 135854 v Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the External Data Search dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Action Taken Select the action to be taken on the external data file for which to search Value values All default ProcessFile MBProcessFile Import MBlImport Send Export Action Performed Between Define a range of dates and times on which to search defining when the action was performed on the external data file in Y Y YY MM DD and HH MM SS format Note Click the arrow to access the calendar control Original Filename Gentran Serve
16. Note Do not use special characters 4 In the Name box type the partner name 5 In the EDI Code box type the EDI identifier for this partner Note The system uses this identifier during inbound processing to select the correct partner Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Creating a Partner Definition Step Action 6 If necessary in the Application Code box type an application code to identify this partner Note The system uses this identifier during outbound import processing to select the correct partner 7 Select the appropriate mailbox from the Default Mailbox list OR Click New Mailbox to create a new mailbox Note See the Communications User s Guide for more information about creating mailboxes 8 After you enter all the partner definition information click Save 9 Click Exit to return to the Partner Editor dialog box Note To complete the partner profile you need to define an inbound or outbound relationship or both Ifyou are receiving and processing information from this trading partner you need to define an appropriate inbound relationship established Ifyou are sending information to this trading partner you need to define an outbound relationship Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 C
17. Part Function Delete Deletes the selected mailbox criteria from the system Warning The system removes the criteria without prompting you to confirm the deletion Mailbox Displays the mailbox name Location Displays the location of the messages Days Old Displays the age in days of the messages to be archived Status Displays the status of the messages that are to be archived The default is All Content type Displays the content type of the messages The default selection 1s Any Save Saves the archive definition and exits the Mailbox Archive Definition dialog box Cancel Exits the Mailbox Archive Definition dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box Using Archive and Restore 10 24 Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Mailbox Selection Criteria dialog box Mailbox Selection Criteria x Mailbox All Location Both C Inbox C Qutbox Days Old o Status All v Content Type Any Parts and The following lists the parts of the Mailbox Selection Criteria dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Mailbox Select a mailbox default All Location Choose Both Inbox and Outbox Inbox or Outbox Days old Specify the age in days of the
18. 003030 Transaction Set 997 Delete Translation Envelope lt lt Advanced pes REM pnm EM ue tee Help Groups Dutbnd X3030 FA Grp Interchanges Dutbnd x3030 FA Int Last Used Control Number foooo D Expect Acknowledgement F Duplicate Documents Aous Overdue jo Test Indicator C Test Production Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Using Partners The following lists the parts of the Outbound Relationship dialog box and their Function Select the relationship description Specifies the EDI standard to be used in this relationship Note Only standards for which you have existing translation objects are displayed This box cannot be changed for an existing relationship Selection of this box is mandatory Valid values A TRADACOMS C CII D NCPDP E EDIFACT O ODETTE P OTHER R ROSETTANET T TDCC U UCS V VDA X X12 3 36 Parts and functions functions Part Relationship Description Standard Version Select the EDI standard version to be used in this relationship Note Only versions of the selected standard for which you have existing translation objects are displayed If this box 1s changed for an existing relationship all of the information defined below it is cleared and must be reselected Selection of this box is mandatory Transaction Set Sel
19. Function Delete Deletes the selected external data criteria from the system Warning The system removes the criteria without prompting you to confirm the deletion Action Taken Displays the action taken on the external data file Value values All default value ProcessFile gt MBProcessFile Import MBImport Send Export Days old Displays the age in days ofthe external data files to be archived Archive Ext Data Files Displays the archived external data files Save Saves the archive definition and exits the External Data Archive Definition dialog box Cancel Exits the External Data Archive Definition dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 External Data Selection Criteria Dialog Box Using Archive and Restore 10 30 External Data Selection Criteria Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the External Data Selection Criteria dialog box External Data Selection Criteria x Action Taken All X Days Old NN Archive Files Parts and The following lists the parts of the External Data Selection Criteria dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Action Taken Select the action to be taken on the external data file Value values All default value ProcessFile gt MBProcessFile Import
20. Reference See the Application Integration User s Guide for more information about using standard and extended rules Test Indicator Specify if this relationship definition is in test or production mode The default value is production Save Saves the modified information Exit New Exits the Outbound Relationship dialog box Accesses the New Outbound Relationship dialog box which allows you to create a new relationship Delete Removes the specified outbound relationship from the system Translation Accesses the Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box Envelope Accesses one of the following Outbound Envelope dialog boxes depending on which version you specified Outbound UNH Envelope Outbound MHD Envelope Outbound ST Envelope Reference Refer to the Partner Editor online help for specific information about the envelope dialog boxes Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Part Function Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box Using Partners 3 40 Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box Introduction The Outbound Translation Objects dialog b
21. Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the New Table dialog box Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners CrossRef Select Dialog Box CrossRef Select Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Parts and functions The CrossRef Select dialog box contains all cross reference partner tables The following illustrates the CrossRef Select dialog box CrossRef Select PETZONE x Table Name PRODCODE Items New 12345679901234 lt gt 555666411 23456789012345 lt gt 555666817 Edt 34567890123456 lt gt 555666908 45678901234567 lt gt 555666321 Delete 56789012345678 lt gt 555666287 67890123456789 lt gt 555666413 Help The following lists the parts of the CrossRef Select dialog box and their functions Part Function Items Displays a list of table items Exit Exits the CrossRef Select dialog box New Accesses the CrossRef Entry Dialog Box which allows you to create a new table item Edit Accesses the CrossRef Entry Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected table item Delete Removes the selected table item Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 CrossRef Entry Dialog Box 3 96 Using Partners CrossRef Entry Dialog Box Introduction The
22. 810 PETZONE 2 View PETZ NE Print PETZONE 0000000006 NotOK as Delete Export Refresh E 2 Documents 1 selected Close Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Out Documents browser and their functions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box which allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print the selected document Delete Deletes the selected document Export Not a valid function from this browser Move Moves the selected document to the In Drawer Refresh Refreshes the browser display Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Out Drawer Browser Out Drawer Browser Introduction The Out Drawer browser contains a list of documents that the system successfully sent Diagram The following illustrates the Out Drawer browser Out Drawer Rons Eggs Purchase Order Request Action 1 L C EX Close Refresh 1 Documents 1 selected Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Out Drawer browser and their functions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box which allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print t
23. At least one of the Direction check boxes must be selected Click OK System response The system filters the restored interchange display based on the criteria you selected Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Viewing Restored Documents D 10 55 Viewing Restored Documents Introduction You can view the individual documents in an interchange as long as a screen entry translation object for each document is available on your system Procedure To view the documents within a restored interchange complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Restored Interchanges System response The system displays the Restored Interchanges Browser Note To refresh the display of the Interchanges browser right click the middle pane and select Refresh from the shortcut menu or press F5 2 Select a document and proceed with the next step or double click a document to view it Note You must have a screen entry translation object for this document available on your system Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Restored Documents 10 56 Using Archive and Restore Step Action With a document selected use this table to determine your next step IF you want to THEN sele
24. For restored interchanges you can then view the data in the Restored Interchange browser and reprocess it if necessary When to use We recommend that you archive your system data on a weekly basis Using this archive feature is critical in large volume operations Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Overview Archiving Data Overview Types of data The Archive feature enables you to archive the following types of data that can be gt Inbound and outbound interchanges Gentran EDI archived 5 Mailbox messages and any corresponding attachments External data Note If a document is waiting for acknowledgement processing acknowledgement generation or reconciliation you will not be able to archive it until this processing is complete Archive You can completely configure the Archive feature by using stored archive definition definitions An archive definition is a set of archive parameters that you set to specify the exact data that you want the system to archive The system saves the archive definition file ARD file so you can execute the same archive process repeatedly without having to define parameters again Reference See Creating an Archive Definition on page 10 36 for more information Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 10 4 Using Archive and Restore T
25. Pet Zone ANSI X12 Invoice 810 Pet Zone 0714653 P018536 MWT Co 4575 Lakehurst Ct uin df 43076 PETZONE Accounts Payable 1 Pet Zone Plaza COOS wo Se 1 11 96 Modify the data as required Note If the document contains a looping structure lower level detail records such as line items the input translation object contains a list as shown below Document E ditor ANSI X12 Invoice 810 Pet Zone Continued on next page f Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Opening and Editing Documents Step Action To add a new line item highlight the first entry and click New To access items in the list highlight the entry to be changed and click Open or double click the item System response The system displays the list item details as shown below Line Items olx Item No Product Code 14532 Quantity UOM Boo rz v Price Description Large Dog Collar Date Shipped 05711797 Transport Method 7 Carrier Code PS You can now change or enter the data for the item Notes To move through the entries use Next and Prev To enter a second or subsequent item click Next or press ALT T After all loop items are entered click Store to save and exit the loop dialog box Ifthe document contains codes press SHIFT F1 from each code field to acc
26. The system displays the Process Control dialog box Events tab Select an event and click Delete to delete the current selection System response The Gentran Server Process Control dialog box asks you to confirm the delete operation Click OK System response The event is deleted Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 D Viewing Events Using Process Control 11 32 Viewing Events Events tab Active Events tab The Gentran Server Process Control dialog enables you to view all the events defined in your system On the Events tab the following specifications are listed for each event Event description Time Parameters day of week if timed or result if polled Controller on which the event runs Time started Time ended Session name Calendar name timed events only File name polled events only Filtering event display You can filter the display of events on the Events tab by the controller on which the events are scheduled to run You can also sort the events by description controller and status The Active Events tab enables you to view only the events that are currently processing This feature also allows you to view currently processing system events such as temporary communication sessions Event list
27. archive definition files summary data about the control information that was archived the detailed contents of the data stored in the archive data file Notes When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Youcan sort the Archive tree by filename or by date time The Archive Manager also provides you with a search facility that enables you to quickly define search parameters that are used to find a specific piece of information The system displays the matching results in the How to Archive Data You can then select the desired information and the system highlights it in the Archive Manager tree view The Archive Manager retains extensive data for the information you archive and enables you to easily view it Reference See Viewing Archived Data on page 10 39 for more information The Archive Manager user interface uses a tree structure that displays the hierarchical levels of the archived data This table lists the information available for each level of the Archive entry for Gentran EDI Mailbox and External Data Note N A indicates that the item is a graphical placeholder used only to illustrate the type of data that was archived IF you select the THEN you can view archive file at the summary information including the following Gentran EDI Mailbox or External Data level date and time the archive sta
28. checked do not expect an acknowledgement Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box Part Function Hours Overdue Specify how many hours must elapse before an expected functional acknowledgement is considered overdue This box is only valid if the Expect Acknowledgement box is checked The default value for this box is 48 indicating that the acknowledgement will be considered overdue in two days If you enter a value of 0 zero in this box the acknowledgement will be immediately considered overdue Note This box is disabled if Expect Acknowledgement is not checked Sequence From Group Specify if the transaction set control number options for this group setup should be controlled at the group level If this box is not checked the following two fields are disabled Last Used Control Number Specify a value that will be used to generate the next transaction set control number for the sets defined within this functional group The number generated will always be one more than the number in this box This box will initially be set to zero Note This box is disabled if Sequence From Group is not checked Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Group En
29. documents and how to view the Send Queue Chapter 6 Using Interchanges explains how to view interchanges and the documents within interchanges how to filter the display of interchanges how to attach link an interchange to a partner and how to resend interchanges Chapter 7 Using External Data explains how to view and print external data files Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Description of contents contd Online Help Chapter 8 Using Acknowledgements explains how to manually set a document group or interchange to acknowledged how to define inbound and outbound acknowledgement criteria for document reconciliation and how to check for overdue acknowledgements Chapter 9 Using Tracking explains how to view and print tracking information Chapter 10 Using Archive and Restore explains how to archive data and restore archived data to the system Chapter 11 Using Process Control explains how to create edit delete activate and suspend automatic process control events This chapter also describes how to use sessions and calendars The Glossary contains definitions of EDI and Gentran Server terms and concepts The majority of the documentation for Gentran Server is contained in the Online Help system This includes all dialog box element definitions detailed processing information and the how to information that is contai
30. invalid trailer control count or a control number sequence checking error If any of these errors occur they will be listed on the translator report for the interchange containing the document Duplicate yellow Indicates the document has the same name as another document on the system Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 EB Interchange Filter Dialog Box 7 8 Interchange Filter Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Parts and functions Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Using Interchanges The Interchange Filter dialog box allows you to filter the display of interchanges by date partner and direction inbound and outbound Note You can set global Interchange Filter preferences in the Gentran Server Preferences dialog box on Interchange Filter tab Access the Preferences dialog box by selecting Preferences from the Options menu The following illustrates the Interchange Filter dialog box Interchange Filter Partner Date From OF February 97 15 00 gt ifs D February DO 16 00 Iz v Always Current Unselect All Partners No Date Time Checking M InBound E Direction v DOutBound 3 j Cancel The following lists the parts of the Interchange Filter dialog box and their functions Part Function Date From Select the begin
31. the system first determines if it is a TRADACOMS interchange If the interchange is TRADACOMS the system increments the current version number in the FIL segment by one After this update the interchange is resent in the same manner as all other interchanges Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Communication is established with the remote end The status of the message is updated based on the success or failure of the communications session Ifcommunication fails because there is no mailbox set up or the Mailbox service is not started the interchange and documents are left in a Ready to send status Ifcommunication fails because there is no modem the interchange and documents are left in a Queued status Note No user action is required at this point Interchanges that failed to send are automatically sent as part of the next transmission session The documents are moved to the Out Drawer Browser and the interchange status 1s set to Sent Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Manually Acknowledging an Interchange Group or Document Using Interchanges 7 20 Manually Acknowledging an Interchange Group or Document Introduction The Acknowledge function does not generate an acknowledgement it merely changes the status of the outbound document The status of an interchange group or document in the Interchanges browser may need to be manually set to acknowledged for many reasons Exam
32. 1 16 T tables deleting 3 107 deleting entries 3 106 TDCC 1 16 technical support 1 xi templates registering 2 7 using 2 1 The Desk 1 8 third party network 1 16 title bar 1 7 1 16 Toolbar 1 7 1 8 1 16 tracking 1 16 printing document information 9 9 9 10 using 9 1 viewing document information 9 9 9 10 TRADACOMS 1 16 trading partner 1 17 transaction set 1 17 translation objects 1 16 translation process inbound 1 9 outbound 1 12 turnaround document 1 17 turnaround map 1 17 U UCS 1 17 UNA envelope 3 75 UNB envelope 3 75 UNG functional group 3 73 UNH envelope 3 70 UnPosting 1 17 using acknowledgements 8 1 using communications 5 1 10 1 using documents 4 1 using interchanges 6 1 7 1 using partners 3 1 using process control 11 1 using templates 2 1 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 using the audit log 9 1 interchanges 6 8 7 10 using tracking 9 1 Send Queue 5 13 tracking information 9 10 V version 1 17 Ww VICS 1 17 WorkSpace 1 17 viewing 1 17 data audit information 9 9 X documents 4 51 X12 1 17 documents within interchanges 6 10 7 14 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide
33. All default Received Sent ReadyToSend Queued Held SendFailed Network Status Select the network status of the interchanges that are to be archived Valid values All default NotSent ReceivedOK ReceivedWarning ReceivedError PickedUp ThirdParty Ack Status Select the acknowledgement status of the interchanges that are to be archived Valid values All default ReconcileNotRequired Reconcile Waiting ReconciledOK ReconciledErrors ReconciledPartial ReconciledReject ReconcileOverdue Save Saves the selection criteria and exits the Interchange Selection Criteria dialog box Cancel Exits the Interchange Selection Criteria dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Interchange Search Dialog Box DJ 10 15 Interchange Search Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Interchange Search dialog box Interchange Search Sent Between Parts and The following lists the parts of the Interchange Search dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Partner Select a partner profile ID default is All Direction Choose Both inbound and outbound Inbound or Outbound Control No Specify a control number Receive
34. Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Editing Sessions 11 12 Editing Sessions Using Process Control Introduction Ifan event calls a session that is currently processing or is activated you are unable to edit and save the session until the event has either finished processing or you suspend the event However you can edit the session and use the Save As function to save it under another name Reference See Procedure suspending an event on page 11 37 for more information Procedure To edit an existing session complete the following steps Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Click the Sessions tab to access the sessions options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Sessions tab Select a session to display the session script With the session selected click Ins to insert a command above the current line System response The system displays the Action Setup dialog box From the Command list select a command Note The Commands list allows you to select which command you want to add to the script which enables you to access the parameters for that command displayed below this box in the Action Setup section Reference See Commands on page 11 6 for more information
35. Control dialog box To view active events complete the following steps Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Active Events tab 2 From the Event list select the event for which you want to view further detail Note The system displays each command and its associated parameters in the session script for that event in the Session list The session command currently being processed is indicated with a green arrow Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Viewing Events 11 35 Step Action Click OK If necessary change the Refresh options Ifyou want to change the interval in which the dialog box is automatically refreshed type the interval in seconds at which you want the system to refresh the dialog box the default is 20 seconds in the Seconds box Valid values are 2 300 seconds Note This value is saved when you change focus on the dialog box click another box The Auto Refresh check box must be selected for the Seconds box to be available Ifyou do not want the Active Events tab on the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box to automatically refresh so you have to manually click Refresh click the Auto Refresh check box to deselect it Notes The default for automati
36. Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 for information about how to establish an outbound relationship to generate acknowledgements Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Defining Inbound Acknowledgement Criteria Using Acknowledgements 8 4 Procedure To define criteria to generate acknowledgements complete the following steps Step 1 Action Document acknowledgement criteria is defined when you set up the partner relationship using the Advanced options on the Inbound Relationship Dialog Box which are illustrated below Sequence Checking Last Used Control Number Generate Acknowledgments Oo oooo No C Duplicate Duplicate Documents Yes No Error Detail Incremental r Mil r C Chronological Skip Compliance Check Yes With Error Detail Acknowledgement Processing Test Indicator C Test Production C Deferred Immediate Note If you select Immediate acknowledgement processing acknowledgement reconciliation occurs during the inbound break session If you select Deferred acknowledgement processing the default reconciliation occurs at its scheduled interval References See System Configuration System Tab in the Administration Guide for more information about setting the intervals for deferred acknowledgement processing See Creating an Inbound Relationship on page 3 58 for more information
37. Data Audits from the shortcut menu document tracking information displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane right click the document and select View Tracking Info from the shortcut menu document file displayed in an external viewer right click the document and select View Data External Viewer from the shortcut menu document file displayed in the Archive Manager lower right pane right click the document and select View Data Screen from the shortcut menu Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Viewing Archived Data 10 41 Manager upper right pane Step Action 5 message information select the message contd displayed in the Archive message data audit displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane right click the message and select View Data Audits from the shortcut menu attachment information displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane select the attachment attachment data audit displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane right click the attachment and select View Data Audits from the shortcut menu attachment file displayed in an external viewer right click the attachment and select View Data External Viewer from the shortcut menu attachment file disp
38. Data Browser System response The system displays the External Data Summary Viewer Do you want to filter the display of external data files by action or date Ifyes see Filtering External Data Files on page 6 9 Ifno continue with step 3 Select an external data file Use the following table to determine your next step To view the external data for a single selected file Select View gt External Data gt Related External Data Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu To view the related EDI data Select View gt External Data gt Gentran Data Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu To view the translator report for actions taken on the external data file Select View gt External Data gt Translator Report To delete the external data file from the External Data folder Select the appropriate file in the left pane of the viewer 2 Select View gt Delete To print the external data file EDI data or translator report Select the appropriate right pane of the viewer 2 Select File gt Print Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using External Data Filtering E
39. Definition dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Profile ID Specify a unique identifier for the selected partner Name Specify a unique name for the partner Note Make this name as descriptive as possible because this 1s the name displayed in the partner selection list EDI Code Specify the EDI identifier for this partner The system uses this value during inbound processing to select the correct trading partner definition Application Code Specify an application code used to identify this partner The system uses this value during outbound import processing to select the correct trading partner definition Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box Part Function Default Mailbox Select a default mailbox to use to identify this partner for non RosettaNet EDI relationships Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Default E mail Specify a default e mail address to use to identify this Address partner for non RosettaNet EDI relationships Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Partner Definition dialog box Help Displays Online Help New Mailbox Displays the Create New Mailbox wizard which allows you to create a new
40. Gentran Server Server Server Edition a Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2000 Server Professional Professional S Installed Components W Client Access Components E Integration Components Installed Components W Process Controller W Client Access Components Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Installed Components W Process Controller default m Client Access Components Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Navigating in Gentran Server Getting Started 1 6 Navigating in Gentran Server Overview The Gentran Server Electronic Commerce EC Manager window allows you to access its functionality in the following ways Select the menu option from the Main Menu Bar Click the appropriate button on the Main Toolbar Click the appropriate button on the Browser Toolbar Click the appropriate part of The Desk Click the appropriate button within a chosen browser window Note The Electronic Commerce Manager display is refreshed when you press F5 or click Refresh available on most browsers Electronic The following illustrates the Gentran Server EC Manager window Commerce Control Menu Title Bar Minimize Maximize Buttons Manager window x Gentran Server Windows on system GENSYS1 a ni xj E a ee Deet cme Dae Das ain tet Eann amp A B EM al en a gi a slal In Workspace Transmit Process Control
41. Manual Introduction This manual is intended to support the online Help by assisting you in performing various tasks in Gentran Server This task oriented approach is intended to answer any questions you may have about Gentran Server with step by step instructions Intended This manual is intended for the staff responsible for the following audience Implementing EDI Setting up trading partner relationships Creating and using EDI documents Sending and receiving documents Acknowledging documents Tracking document flow Configuring and using unattended processing Prerequisite This manual assumes that you are familiar with using a PC and with Microsoft knowledge Windows or Windows 2000 functions Description of This Users Guide contains the following chapters contents Chapter 1 Getting Started explains the content organization and conventions in this guide This chapter also describes how to get technical support introduces Gentran Server for Windows Chapter 2 Using Translation Objects explains how to register install delete and view translation objects Chapter 3 Using Partners explains how to set up a complete partner profile This chapter describes how to import and export a partner profile and partner tables and describes how to copy a partner profile Chapter 4 Using Documents explains all facets of managing your documents Chapter 5 Using Communications explains how to send receive and resend
42. Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Translation Objects Registering New Translation Objects Registering New Translation Objects Introduction Automatic registration Procedure Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide The Register Translation Object function enables you to register your translation object file with Gentran Server so the system can identify the translation object You can set the auto register feature to automatically register translation objects when they are compiled See How to Set the Auto register option in chapter 2 of the Application Integration User s Guide Use this procedure to register a translation object Step Action 1 From the View menu select Translation Objects System response The system displays the EDI Translation Object browser 2 Click New System response The system displays the Register Translation Object dialog box 3 Select the translation object file that you want to register with the system from the list or type it in the File name box Note To highlight a group of translation objects click on the first translation object and then press the SHIFT key and then click on the last translation object in the group To highlight several translation objects that are not adjacent to each other press the CTRL key and click on the translation objects 4 Click Open System response Th
43. Out Documents Summary dialog box Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Documents Browser Select the documents that you want to move back to the Workspace Browser and click UnPost System response The selected documents are moved back to the Workspace Browser Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Responding to Documents Responding to Documents Introduction Turnaround documents Modifying documents Procedure The Respond function automatically generates a response document by transferring data from an inbound source document The Respond function is only available when all of the following are true The In Drawer is the currently selected browser One or more documents are selected Turn Around translation objects exist for the selected documents The Respond function creates a turnaround document using the Turn Around translation object from the Partner relationship see Selecting an inbound translation object on page 3 62 for instructions in response to the currently selected documents You can create a turnaround document for non compliant documents documents with a NotOK status as well as for compliant documents The documents generated by the turnaround process are placed in the Workspace where you can modify them prior to
44. Outbound STX Envelope Outbound VDA Envelope Outbound NCPDP Envelope Outbound Envelope PIP Initiation Reference Refer to the Partner Editor online help for specific information about the envelope dialog boxes Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating a Partner Definition Using Partners 3 56 Creating a Partner Definition Introduction The partner definition contains the basic information about the trading partner that the system needs before you define the rest of the partner profile Prerequisite Before setting up a new partner definition you must have the following knowledge information The communication profile name you use to communicate with this partner The EDI code for this partner Theapplication code used to identify this partner in the import file This application code 1s needed only if the transactions are processed using the file Import facility Procedure To create a partner definition complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box 2 Click New System response The system displays the Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box 3 In the Profile ID box type a unique alphanumeric Profile ID for this partner
45. Partners Creating an Inbound Relationship Procedure To create an inbound relationship complete the following steps Step Action Creating a new inbound relationship From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile for which you want to create an inbound relationship Click Inbound System response The system displays the Inbound Relationship Dialog Box Note You must have already created a partner definition for this partner Reference See Creating a Partner Definition on page 3 56 for more information Click New System response The system displays the New Inbound Relationship dialog box In the description box type a unique relationship name such as Inbound Invoice Click Save System response The system creates an inbound relationship and returns to the Inbound Relationship dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Inbound Relationship Using Partners 3 62 Step Action From the appropriate drop down lists on the Inbound Relationship dialog box select the following Standard Version Transaction Set Release for TRADACOMS only Notes The contents of these lists are displayed from the translation objects registered in Gentran Server
46. STX Sequence Specify if the system will use sequence checking and Checking whether the sequence checking will be incremental or chronological You can also indicate that the system must check for duplicate control numbers None Do not use sequence checking Duplicate Check for duplicate control numbers Incremental The control number must be one greater than the last number Chronological The control number must be greater than the last number Note If the system detects duplicate control numbers or detects incremental or chronological control numbers that are out of sequence those documents will be put in the In Documents Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Part Function Last Used Control Number Specifies a value that will be used to sequence check the next interchange control number The number will be replaced by the control number on the last interchange received This box will initially be set to zero Note This box is disabled if Sequence Checking is None Acknowledge Interchange Instructs the system to send a functional acknowledgement to this trading partner when you receive the interchange set defined in this relationship The default value for this box is not checked do not expect an acknowledgement Ack Translation Se
47. Sessions on page 11 9 for more information 2 Create a process control calendar if necessary Reference See Creating and Editing Calendars on page 11 41 for more information 3 Create the process control event Reference See Creating New Events on page 11 23 for more information 4 Activate the event Reference See Activating and Suspending Events on page 11 36 for more information Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Overview E 11 3 Sessions Overview Introduction A session definition is an integral part of a process control event The session setup process enables you to configure and edit process control session scripts Sessions are defined independently from the event so the same session definition can be scheduled multiple times What is a session X A session script consists of a list of commands Gentran Server functions that the system executes in the sequence listed You can set parameters for each allowable command You can also place conditions on the command you choose These conditions determine whether or not the command is executed within the session script You can specify two types of conditions The system can query for the presence or absence of a specific file the system can determine whether or not documents exist in a specific location If the evaluated condition is true the command is execu
48. Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Restored Interchanges System response The system displays the Restored Interchanges Browser 2 Select the outbound interchange that needs to be resent 3 From the Document menu select Resend System response The system displays the Gentran Server for Windows dialog box 4 Click Yes to start the transmission session Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 mms Resending Restored Interchanges Using Archive and Restore 10 60 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Contents gt Sessions Events gt gt Calendars gt gt gt Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide CHAPTER Using Process Control Inttoduction c v deb vb ee eed ER a 11 2 11 3 OvetvieWceoclestbesbee9Ree e esbvetiexreerbeec eed 11 3 Creating Sessions c 0 cece cece eee tee eee e eens 11 9 Editing Sessions 00 0 cece eee esee 11 12 Deleting Sessions 0 ete nen ni res 11 15 Te Cm ec ee ee re 11 16 OVERVIEW cei E IR GR eee UEREREAE I eRe homes ns 11 16 Creating New Events 0 0 unuan cece ees 11 23 Editing Events or tremo etr eng od aco 11 27 Deleting Events eee 11 31 Viewing Events 0 cc cece eee ehh 11 32 Activating and Suspen
49. The Send Queue contains documents only if a transmission session failed The documents remain in the Send Queue until a successful transmission session occurs no user intervention is required Procedure To view the Send Queue complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the View menu select Send Queue System response The system displays the Send Queue Browser 2 Select a document or documents 3 Click View to view the contents of any of the following Selected document raw EDI data Formatted document Translation report Reference See Viewing Documents on page 4 38 for more information Click Print to print the selected documents or summary of the documents Reference See Printing Documents on page 4 49 for more information Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f Processing Data Files 5 14 Using Communications Processing Data Files Introduction The Process File feature invokes the post communications process with any data file as if the file was received via a communications session This enables you to process a data file from a disk or anywhere on your system Procedure To send a data file to the Communicator complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Commands menu select Process File System response The system displays the Process File Dialog Box Select the desi
50. Viewing and Printing Tracking Information Using Tracking Viewing and Printing Tracking Information Introduction This function displays information that tracks an external data file These records can be viewed from any of the document browsers Procedure To view or print tracking information complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the desired browser System response If you select the In Documents In Documents Out Documents Out Documents In Drawer or Out Drawer browser the appropriate summary dialog for that browser is displayed To access the browser containing those documents select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View Select a single document and select View from the Commands menu System response The system displays the View Choice Dialog Box Select Tracking Information and click OK System response The system displays a Tracking Information window for that document Note The Tracking Information window contains an entry for each set of correlated files If there are more events than can be displayed in the window a scroll bar enables you to view the remaining records Do you want to print the displayed tracking information Ifyes from the File menu select Print Ifno click Close to exit the Tracking window Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Window
51. Workspace contains a list of outbound Work in Progress documents It also contains recently imported or data entry documents The ANSI committee that sets and publishes standards for EDI Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 18 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Symbols In Documents 1 1 Out Documents 1 1 A ack 1 1 acknowledgements 1 1 criteria defining 8 3 defining acknowledgement criteria 8 3 reconciling documents and 8 6 using 8 1 AIAG 1 1 ANA 1 1 ANSI 1 1 application system 1 1 asynchronous 1 1 attaching interchanges to a partner 7 16 audit log 1 1 using 9 1 authorization 1 2 B BAT functional group 3 73 BG envelope 3 75 browser 1 2 Browser Toolbar 1 8 C click 1 2 cluster 1 2 communications using 5 1 10 1 viewing Send Queue 5 13 communications session 1 2 Communicator 1 2 compliance 1 2 compliant 1 2 component data element 1 2 composite data element 1 3 control menu 1 7 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide copy 1 3 creating inbound relationship 3 58 partner definition 3 56 process control event 11 23 cryptographic keys 1 3 customer service 1 xi D data element 1 6 data files processing 5 14 data view windows 1 3 default 1 3 deleting calendar 11 43 entries in a table 3 106 partner locations 3 119 process control event 11 31 process control session 11 15 tables 3 107 Desk The 1 8 1 3 dialog box 1
52. X Partner All Direction Both C Inbound C Outbound Days Old Do v Archive Overdue Groups and Interchanges r Outbound Criteria Processed Status All Network Status All Ack Status All Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Interchange Selection Criteria dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Partner Select a partner profile ID default is All Direction Choose Both inbound and outbound Inbound or Outbound Days old Specify the age in days of the interchanges to be archived Archive Overdue Groups and Interchanges Specify whether overdue groups and interchanges are archived The default is No If selected the system behavior prior to the implementation of Deferred Acknowledgements is implemented where overdue groups and interchanges are archived if the user selects All or ReconcileOverdue for the acknowledgement status and the direction is Both or Outbound If this checkbox is not selected outbound overdue groups and interchanges are not archived Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Interchange Selection Criteria Dialog Box 10 14 Using Archive and Restore Part Function Processed Status Select the processed status of the interchanges that are to be archived Valid values
53. a eai a e eka enw eae Gonads 10 44 Restored Interchanges Browser 0 0000 eeeeeee 10 46 Viewing Restored Interchanges 00 00000 ee 10 51 Filtering the Display of Restored Interchanges 10 53 Viewing Restored Documents o saanuna eee 10 55 Reprocessing Restored Documents 0000 10 57 Resending Restored Interchanges 2 004 10 58 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Introduction Using Archive and Restore 10 2 Introduction In this chapter This chapter explains how to use the interactive archive and restore feature of Gentran Server Archive feature The Archive feature provides a record of past interchanges inbound and outbound application data and mailbox messages This enables you to produce an offline archive data file of interchanges external data or mailbox messages with stored parameters archive definitions that you define This archive data file can be stored long term You can also use Gentran Server Process Control to purge and archive data at predefined intervals Reference See Using Process Control chapter 11 in this guide for more information about scheduling unattended archive sessions Restore feature The Restore feature enables you to reprocess archived data through Gentran Server This feature copies data from an archive data file back to the active system
54. a partner location and all associated records complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System User for which you want to create a location Click Locations System Response The system displays the Location Select Dialog Box From the Locations list select a location Click Delete System response The system displays the Delete Confirmation dialog box Click Yes to confirm the delete Click Exit System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Delete Partner Locations Using Partners 3 120 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide a CHAPTER 4 Using Documents Contents k IEoduttlon cai cene ee Sha ae Ra ROPA OC RR 4 3 Document Browsers 0 cece cece reece cece hh hh nnn n 4 4 Accessing the Document Browsers leseleeeees 4 4 InDocuments Browser 0 c eee eee eh 4 6 In Documents Browser 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 4 8 In Drawer Browser 2 0 e eee eee eee 4 10 Workspace Browser 0 00 c cette eens 4 12 Out Documents Browser 0 0 cece
55. and The following lists the parts of the Inbound Interchange Select dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Interchanges Displays all Interchange definitions established for this trading partner Select Selects the indicated interchange to be used with this relationship Note Select lt none gt if the standard you are using does not require interchanges and you do not want to use one Exit Exits the Inbound Interchange Select dialog box New Displays the Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box which allows you to create a new interchange Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Inbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Using Partners 3 30 Part Function Edit Displays the Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected interchange Delete Removes the selected interchange from the system Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Introduction Diagram The Inbound Interchange Entry dialog box is used to specify a new interchange definition Note EDIFACT version 4 defines the infrastructure necessary to support the creation and processing of interchanges that have been encoded using a character set
56. appropriate interchanges based on the criteria you selected and displays them in the Search Results Dialog Box Cancel Exits the dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Group Search Dialog Box Using Archive and Restore 10 18 Group Search Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Group Search dialog box Partner All b Direction Both C Inbound C Outbound Control Number Group ld Ack Status All v i Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Group Search dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Partner Select a partner profile ID default is All Direction Choose Both inbound and outbound Inbound or Outbound Control No Specify control number Group ID Specify group identifier Ack Status Select the acknowledgement status of the groups to search for Valid values All default ReconcileNotRequired ReconcileWaiting ReconciledOK ReconciledErrors ReconciledPartial ReconciledReject ReconcileOverdue Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Group Search Dialog Box D 10 19 Part Function Find Finds the appropriate groups based on the criteria you selected and displa
57. box and their functions Part Function Selected Items Tells the system to perform the selected items or items the following two fields Formatted Tells the system to print the items as formatted using the appropriate translation object Note This option is unavailable when printing a translation object always formatted or when a print translation object does not exist for the item Move documents Tells the system to move the document to the In Drawer to In Drawer Note This option is only available for the In Documents and In Documents browsers Summary List of Tells the system to print a summary list of the items Items selected in the browser OK Executes the selected function exits the dialog box Cancel Exits the dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Select Export Method Dialog Box Select Export Method Dialog Box Introduction The Select Export Method dialog box enables you to write documents to an external file for processing by another application Notes There must be a system export translation object for the document or a partner specific export translation object for the document The Export function is only valid when one or more documents are selected from one of the following browsers In Documents In Drawer or In Documents Diagram The
58. boxes Process Control dialog box Events tab Event Setup dialog box Process Control dialog box Active Events tab You must have already defined the session definition to be executed prior to creating an event Reference See Creating Sessions on page 11 9 for more information When a timed event is activated the Gentran Scheduler initiates that event at the correct time on the appropriate day or date When a polled event is activated the Gentran Poller polls the controller for the presence or absence of a defined file depending on what 1s indicated in the event definition and initiates the event when the specified file either exists or does not exist based on the event definition Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Overview 11 17 Process Control The following illustrates the Events tab of the Process Control dialog box dialog box Events tab n Gentran Server Process Control Active Events Events Calendars Sessions Description Time Parameter Controller Time Started Time Ende New System AuditP 00 00 SMTWTFS RTETTEN 2 10 00 12 00 41 4M 2 10 00 1 Edit Delete Suspend Execute n Controller lt a Controllers Sort Description 20 Seconds M Auto Refresh Refresh i tl Events tab parts The following lists the parts of the Process Control dialog box Events tab and their and fu
59. can select one or more days of the week on which you never want processing to occur The system allows you to exclude all seven days of the week if that 1s your intention In this situation processing never occurs Todeselect a day clear the check box Click Save to save the new calendar Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Deleting Calendars Deleting Calendars 11 43 Procedure To delete a calendar complete the following steps Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Click the Calendars tab System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Calendars tab Select a calendar and click Delete to delete the current selection System response The Gentran Server Process Control dialog box asks you to confirm the delete operation Click Yes to delete the current selection Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Deleting Calendars Using Process Control 11 44 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Wind
60. configure Gentran Server to copy external information the external data viewer is unavailable References See the following for more information Processing Data Files on page 5 14 Exporting Documents on page 4 59 System Configuration External Data Tab and the Using Database Tables appendix in the Administration Guide Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 ea Tracking Inbound Information Using Tracking Mailbox process When data enters the system through a mailbox all associated message identifiers file process are tracked using the following process Stage Description 1 Your trading partner creates a data file in which ContentType is set to Application EDI An associated message ID is created in the Outbox Your partner sends it to your Gentran Application Inbox which creates a new target message ID The CommMgr the Gentran Server Executive service recognizes the ContentType as Application EDI It receives the data and stores the external data reference in the ExtData_tb in the same way as described in the previous section except that since CommMgr receives the data it saves this database entry The CommMgr builds a temporary session file using the GDW Process MBFile command for unattended processing to execute and Process Control invokes Commpost Commpost builds the IPC file which includes writing the external data key and the
61. data audits file which is viewed either in an external viewer the default viewer 1s Notepad or on screen in the Archive Manager Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu external data any one of the following external data type external data key action date and time of action original filename data audits Upper right pane any one ofthe following depending on the level and type of the selection file information start end number of items archived and if any items were deleted interchange information group information document information message information attachment information gt external data information data audit information tracking information Lower right pane Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide the content of the selected attachment Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Archive Manager Using Archive and Restore Diagram The following illustrates the Archive Manager shown with the Archive tree expanded and a Mailbox message selected Archive Manager Imi x File Archives Definitions Help Beavl la Attachment Id 81 Application MSG File idi Archive Subsystem a E Gentran EDI 150 MSG A Mailbox Definitions f Archives Z4 MyCol
62. display documents with a certain status by selecting the check box next to each status that you do not want displayed Note When you clear a check box the display of that status is turned off The default is to display documents regardless of status Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Click OK System response The contents of the Out Drawer browser are filtered as specified Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Deleting Documents 4 48 Deleting Documents Using Documents Introduction The Delete function is used to remove a document or group of documents from the system Notes When a document is deleted all the associated document information tracking information and translation report information is also deleted When the last document in an interchange is deleted the interchange entry is also deleted Documents in the Send Queue can only be deleted from the Interchanges Browser Procedure To delete a document or group of documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the current location of the document by selecting the location System response If you select one of the document browsers the system displays the appropriate summary dialog box for that browser If the system displays a summary dialog box select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response Access t
63. eee eee 4 14 Out Documents Browser 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 4 16 Out Drawer Browser lle 4 17 Processing Browser 0 00 6 ccc cee ees 4 19 Related Dialog Boxes ccc cece cece re ree cece ween ences 4 20 View Choice Dialog Box 0 00 0 4 20 Print Choice Dialog Box 00 c cee 4 22 Select Export Method Dialog Box 0205 4 23 Choose File to Export Document Dialog Box 4 25 Application Files to Import Dialog Box 4 26 Document Search Dialog Box 0 0 02 ee eee 4 27 p Filter Dialog Box 2 ets 4 29 Creating and Editing Documents lecce 4 31 Creating Documents 0 0 00 4 31 Opening and Editing Documents 02 0205 4 35 Managing Documents cece cece rere reece cece ee ee eee 4 38 Viewing Documents sssseseeeee e 4 38 Viewing Currently Processing Documents 4 4 Finding Specific Text ina Document 4 4 42 Searching for Documents 002 e cee eee eee 4 45 Sorting Documents 0 0 eee ees 4 46 Filtering Out Drawer Documents by Status 4 47 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Using Documents Deleting Documents sssssesleee ee 4 48 Printing Documents 0 4 49 Routing Documen
64. exact name of the table including case Reference See the Application Integration User Guide for more information about standard and extended rules In the Table Type section select the Cross reference or Lookup table option Click Save System response Saves the information you entered and accesses either the CrossRef Select Dialog Box or Lookup Select Dialog Box depending on which type of table you selected in Step 5 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating Partner Tables 3 104 Using Partners Step Action Click New System response Displays either the CrossRef Entry Dialog Box or Lookup Entry Dialog Box depending on which type of table you selected in Step 5 Type the following table values Two values for a cross reference and one value for a lookup table A description Note How your data is used depends on how the translation object is defined Consult with the translation object designer if you are unclear about what is required Click Save after each entry to save the information and enter another table record Once you finish typing all entries click Exit to return to the Cross reference or Lookup Select dialog box Click Exit to return to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s
65. file Note Depending on the content of the file the system may prompt you for partner transaction or translation object information The Import function does not affect any documents that may be selected Diagram The following illustrates the Application Files to Import dialog box Application Files to Import Fix Lookin imports O amp c j ae File name Pet 8 D t t Files of type oi files Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Application Files to Import dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Look in Select the folder where the system should look for the file Displays the current File name Specify the name of the export file Files of type Select the type of file Open Executes the selected function exits the dialog box Cancel Exits the dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Document Search Dialog Box Document Search Dialog Box Introduction The Document Search dialog box enables you to specify criteria for which Gentran Server performs a system wide search This enables you to quickly access a subset of documents without searching each browser manually Diagram The following illustrates the Document Search dialog box Document Search xc Enter search criteria to display Tracking Information for each match found
66. following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box 2 Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System table User for which you want to export a Cross reference or Lookup Click Tables System Response The system displays the Partner Tables Dialog Box 3 Click Export Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide System response The system displays the Table Export File Build Dialog Box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Exporting Partner Tables 3 110 Using Partners Step Action From the Save in drop down list select the location of the exported table file Note You can only export Gentran Server partner tables Type the export file name in the File name box OR Select it from the list Note The default file extension for cross reference tables is xrf The default file extension for lookup tables is Ikp Click Save to begin the export process Note When the export process is complete the system displays an informational dialog box Click OK System Response The system returns to the Partner Tables dialog box Click Exit System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Par
67. for further processing The received document could not be associated with a specific trading partner If this is the case the partner listed for the document in question is Unknown To associate this document and the other documents received in the interchange with a partner attach the documents from the Interchange browser A suitable trading relationship or translation object could not be associated with the document Detailed information concerning what information was used to locate the relationship and or the translation object is listed in the audit log To correct this problem a valid relationship must be established using the Partner Editor and a valid export print or turn around translation object must be defined for that relationship Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 14 A major error occurred while processing the interchange functional group or transaction level enveloping structures This error may include header and trailer control numbers that do not match an invalid trailer control count or a control number sequence checking error If any of these errors occur they are listed on the translator report for the interchange containing the document EJ Duplicate The document has the same name as another document on the system Out Documents OK This code indicates that the document is fully compliant with the EDI standard Documents with this status can be
68. from your system Notes Youcan only import and export Gentran Server partner tables Tables are used only if you create a translation object that specifically accesses those tables Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Partner Tables Dialog Box Partner Tables Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Parts and functions The Partner Tables dialog box enables you to create edit or delete cross reference or lookup tables Tables are only used with translation objects that are designed to incorporate that data When you receive a translation object from Sterling Commerce you will be informed if you need to create tables to be used with that translation object The following illustrates the Partner Tables dialog box Partner Tables PETZONE Eg Tables CrossRef PRODCODE The following lists the parts of the Partner Tables dialog box and their functions Part Function Tables Displays all currently defined partner tables Exit Exits the Partner Tables dialog box New Accesses the New Table Dialog Box which allows you to create a new table Edit Accesses either the CrossRef Select Dialog Box or the Lookup Select Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected table Delete Removes the selected partner table from the system Import Accesses the Table Import File Select Dialog Box which enables you to import a partner
69. help resolve a problem with a document These records can be viewed from any of the document browsers Procedure To view or print data audit information complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the desired browser System response If you select the In Documents In Documents Out Documents Out Documents In Drawer or Out Drawer browser the appropriate summary dialog for that browser is displayed 2 To access the browser containing those documents select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View 3 Select a single document and select View from the Commands menu System response The system displays the View Choice Dialog Box 4 Select Data Audit and click OK System response The system displays a Document Audit window for that document Note The Document Audit window contains the audit messages specific to the selected document The information in this window includes the severity of the message event ID event name audit number user name machine name and message Reference See Using the Audit Notification System in the Administration Guide for more information 5 Do you want to print the displayed data audit information Ifyes from the File menu select Print Ifno click Close to exit the Tracking window Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j
70. if Sequence Checking is None Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Inbound Relationship Dialog Box Part Function Duplicate Documents Specify if the system will check for duplicate document names Notes Ifthe system detects duplicate document name it will locate those documents in In Documents If duplicate document checking is activated for a relationship the translation object used in this relationship must update the document name via a standard or extended rule Reference See the Application Integration User s Guide for more information about using standard and extended rules Skip Compliance Check Specify if you want the system to compliance check the documents for this relationship Generate Acknowledgements Instructs the system to generate a functional acknowledgement to this trading partner when you receive the transaction set message defined in this relationship The default value for this box is No Valid values No Do not generate acknowledgements Yes No Error Detail Generate acknowledgements without error detail Yes With Error Detail Generate acknowledgements with error detail Note This entire box is inactive dimmed if the document transaction set in this relationship is an acknowledgement Test Indicator Specify if this relationship definition is in tes
71. listed in alphabetic order of Description the event descriptions Note This is the default the events listed in alphabetic order of Controller the controller the events listed by Status 1 currently processing events red indicator 2 blocked events green indicator with red x activated events green indicator 4 suspended events yellow indicator Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Events 11 34 Procedure viewing active events Using Process Control Step Action If necessary change the Refresh options Ifyou want to change the interval in which the dialog box is automatically refreshed type the interval in seconds at which you want the system to refresh the dialog box the default is 20 seconds in the Seconds box Valid values are 2 300 seconds Note This value is saved when you change focus on the dialog box click another box The Auto Refresh check box must be selected checked for the Seconds box to be available Ifyou do not want the Events tab on the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box to automatically refresh so you have to manually click Refresh click the Auto Refresh check box to deselect it Note The default for automatic refresh so you do not have to click Refresh is enabled checked Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process
72. mailbox Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Edit Mailbox Displays the Mailbox Properties dialog box which allows you to edit the mailbox Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Em Inbound Relationship Dialog Box Using Partners 3 10 Inbound Relationship Dialog Box Introduction Inbound relationships define the parameters the system needs to receive an EDI document from a trading partner The Inbound Relationship dialog box controls other subordinate dialogs that allow you to define everything that is necessary to establish the relationship You are required to specify exactly which document is to be received You also define which translation objects are used to define the turnaround documents export rules or printing requirements Diagram The following illustrates the Inbound Relationship dialog box with the Advanced options displayed Inbound Relationship PETZONE Inbound Purchase Order ANSI 3030 standardi Dest sed Sonata f BITTER f Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound Relationship Dialog Box The following lists the parts of the Inbound Relationship dialog box and their Function Select the existing inbound relationship Specifies the EDI st
73. messages to be archived Status Select the status of the messages that are to be archived Valid values All default Delivered Picked Up Read Sent Sent Third Party Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box D 10 25 Part Function Content type Select the content type of the messages Valid values Any default Application EDI Application Document EDI Application Import Application rosettanet agent only if Gentran Server for RosettaNet is installed Note This edit box allows you to enter any content type you created Save Saves the selection criteria and exits the Mailbox Selection Criteria dialog box Cancel Exits the Mailbox Selection Criteria dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Mailbox Search Dialog Box 10 26 Using Archive and Restore Mailbox Search Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Mailbox Search dialog box Mailbox All Y Location Both C Inbox C Qutbox Status All E Content Type Any v Created Between 2000 02714 13 02 59 and 2000 02714 13 02 59 M Sent Between 2000 02714 13 02 53 and 2000 02714 13 02 58 M Received Between 2000 02714 13 02
74. month of the selected calendar Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 11 40 Using Process Control Part Function Previous Displays the previous month in the calendar Note This button is only activated if a calendar is selected and a previous month exists for the calendar Next Displays the next month in the calendar Note This button is only activated if a calendar is selected Exclude Select which days of the week to exclude from processing These are displayed with red Xs through them Accesses the New Calendar dialog box so you can create a new calendar Save Saves the current calendar Note The Save command is only active if a calendar is displayed in the middle of the dialog box Save As Delete Saves the current calendar under another name Note The Save As command is only active if a calendar is displayed in the middle of the dialog box Deletes the selected calendar Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Creating and Editing Calendars 11 41 Creating and Editing Calendars Procedure To create or edit a calendar complete the following steps Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Click the Calenda
75. of information You can then select the desired information and the system highlights it in the Archive Manager tree view Procedure To search for a specific piece of archived data complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Archive System response The system displays the Archive Manager From the Archive Subsystem tree select the appropriate Gentran EDI Mailbox or External Data Archives folder From the Archives menu select Search and then select one of the following Message Interchange Group Document External Data System response The system displays the appropriate Search Dialog Box Select the appropriate parameters Note If you do not change any parameters on a search dialog box the system finds the default all items Click Find to execute the search System response The system displays the Search Results Dialog Box Reference See Archiving Data on page 10 38 for more information about the actions you can perform on the Search dialog box Click Close to exit the Search Results dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 10 44 Using Archive and Restore Restoring Archived Data Overview Restore feature Restore caveats Moving archive files to tape The Restore feature enables you to view and reprocess data v
76. on your system Browser You can perform the following functions on the Interchanges browser functions Filter the display of interchanges by date partner and direction inbound and outbound from the Interchanges Filter dialog box Display the external data raw EDI data and translator report data for the selected interchange or document in the appropriate browser panes Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Toggle the status of interchanges between Ready to Send and Hold Manually change the status of groups to Acknowledged Print or delete a selected item Note You might want to use the toggle function if you do not want to send an interchange right away Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Interchanges Interchanges Browser Diagram The following illustrates the Interchanges browser with external data EDI data and translator report options turned on i nterchanges Summary 2 OF X E amp fall Partners Date Time Checking is Off 3 Root Control Number Type Doc Name Refer HDRPETTEST X003030810 05 10 2002 09 33 Ar dix 0001 810 5555555555 32227 BEG331111111 000004555555555595 5 0 1 PETZONE 555555555555950515 15 15 30X0 is is 0001 PET
77. on which version you specified on the Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Outbound GS Functional Group Outbound UNG Functional Group Outbound BAT Functional Group Reference Refer to the Partner Editor online help for specific information about the envelope dialog boxes Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Using Partners Outbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Introduction The Outbound Interchange Select dialog box is used to select an existing interchange definition to be associated with this relationship It can also be used to initiate the definition of a new interchange or to modify or delete an existing definition The interchanges available to you are determined by the version you selected on the Outbound Relationship dialog box Interchanges are required for EDIFACT ODETTE TRADACOMS and UCS and are optional for ANSI X12 and TDCC Diagram The following illustrates the Outbound Interchange Select dialog box Outbound Interchange Select PETZONE x Select Exit Interchanges Qutbnd 553030 FA Int Qutbnd 543030 IN Int Outbnd 553040 FA Int Outbnd 553040 IN Int Parts and The following lists the parts of the Outbound Interchange Select dialog box and functions their functions Part
78. optional See Outbound groups and interchanges on page 3 66 to determine what is optional for the standard you are using If you will receive functional acknowledgements for the outbound documents set up the corresponding inbound relationship to receive the acknowledgements you expect from your partner Reference See Creating an Inbound Relationship on page 3 58 for more information Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Creating an Outbound Relationship Procedure To create an outbound relationship complete the following steps Step Action Creating a new outbound relationship From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile for which you want to create an outbound relationship Click Outbound System response The system displays the Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Note You must have already created a partner definition for this partner Reference See Creating a Partner Definition on page 3 56 for more information Click New System response The system displays the New Outbound Relationship dialog box In the description box type a unique relationship name Click Save System response The system creates an outbound relationship and returns to the Outbound Relationship dialog box C
79. output of an inbound translation to the Mailbox Server Manager This allows the Mailbox Server Manager to act as a message broker responsible for delivering the data to its final destination Note If you specified the Export File Name it is still valid and will become the Attachment Filename Formatting characters are still valid for the filename and could cause multiple attachments to be created 1f document key is used For example if the following filename is used d NgensrvntNexportsNdockey Kprocid Puniqueid U dat a new attachment is created for each document because the document key creates a unique name for each document processed To set up an export to a mailbox you must complete the following components on the Inbound Translation Objects dialog box Inthe Export File Name box type the file name Select the Export to Mailbox checkbox From the Recipient Mailbox list select the mailbox the Recipient E mail Address is optional Inthe Content Type SubType box type a content type content subtype is optional Use Partner Default Mailbox and E mail Address Specify if the output of the inbound translation is exported to the default mailbox and e mail address configured for this partner Recipient Mailbox New Mailbox Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Select the mailbox to which the output of an inbound translation is delivered Or click New Mailbox to display the Create Ne
80. received to create the natural response document that contains as many elements from the received document as possible Export File This translation object indicates that when a document is received it is exported to a specified file format Print This translation object is used to print documents Outbound Translation Objects Import This translation object is used to import data from an application file Print This translation object is used to print documents Data Entry This translation object is used to enter data into the Document Editor facility See Network The title bar of an application window contains the name of the application and enables you to move the window to another position on your desktop Contains buttons that graphically represent commands available in the Menu Bar This function displays tracking information for a single selected document This function displays tracking information for a single selected document The U K standards for EDI that are published by the Article Numbering Association UK LTD Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide trading partner transaction set document turnaround document turnaround map UCS UnPost version view VICS Workspace X12 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide GL 17 Another company with which your company trades documents Also referred to as a partner A busine
81. sending Note To modify a document a Screen Entry translation object must be set up in the outbound relationship for the created document Reference See Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 for instructions on setting up an appropriate screen entry translation object To respond to one or more documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select In Drawer System response The system displays the In Drawer Summary dialog box 2 Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the In Drawer Browser Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Responding to Documents Using Documents 4 56 Step Action 3 Select the document or documents for which you want to create a turnaround response document and click Respond System response The system automatically creates a turnaround document in response to each document you selected by using the Turn Around translation object that you specified in the Partner relationship The turnaround documents that are produced are displayed in the Workspace for you to modify 1f necessary before posting to the Out Documents Browser Reference See Posting Documents on page 4 53 for instructions Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Ge
82. steps Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Click the Sessions tab to access the sessions options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Sessions tab Select a session and click Delete System response The Gentran Server Process Control dialog box asks you to confirm the delete operation Click Yes to delete the current selection Click OK to exit the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 11 16 Events Overview Introduction Before you begin Timed events Polled events Using Process Control Events are a combination of the following Atime or day to execute or a file name for which the system checks Thecontroller on which the event is processed A session definition The Process Control runs events based on whether they are timed or polled You define the events in a session definition The Process Control enables you to process an event at a specified time every day Additional options enable you to restrict processing to certain days of the week or a specific date In addition you can define calendars to exclude specific holidays or days of the week from the processing schedule You manage events by using the following dialog
83. the translator repeats steps 3 5 until all documents are processed If you manually import a file through the EC Manager or use the Document Editor you need to post the compliant document to the Out Documents Note Once documents are located in the Out Documents they can be sent using the process control system or by using the EC Manager transmit option Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Changing your Password 1 14 Getting Started Changing your Password Introduction Your Gentran Server password is stored in your User Access profile Notes You must know your old password to change it If you have forgotten your password please contact your system administrator Ifyou are using Integrated security you may also need to change your Gentran Server and database passwords if you change your Windows password Reference See your system administrator if you have any questions about which security mode you use Procedure Use this procedure to change your password Step Action 1 From the Options menu select Preferences System response The Preferences dialog box is displayed Select the Change Password tab to access that option In the Old Password box type your old password In the New Password box type your new password In the Confirm New Password box type your new password again Note If the Co
84. 0 Using Archive and Restore k Introduction sesa ccd had Hi boda debe meee E eR Ad 10 2 Archiving DAG Lic edes YE RARE a3 CERRAR ERE ERE DERE RACER ER 10 3 D OVerVIeW ems e E Py EXPENSE PUE RIS dea Gd a eds 10 3 p Archive Manager cc l4 ee RR Ru ee Ea ia edere oberen 10 5 Gentran EDI Archive Definition Dialog Box 0 00 e cee eee 10 11 Interchange Selection Criteria Dialog Box 0 00 cece eee ees 10 13 Interchange Search Dialog Box 2 0 cece teens 10 15 Group Search Dialog Box 00 t eens 10 18 Document Search Dialog Box 0 00 ccc eee 10 20 Mailbox Archive Definition Dialog Box 0 e ccs 10 22 Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box 2 0 cece ees 10 24 Mailbox Search Dialog Box 0 eee ne 10 26 External Data Archive Definition Dialog Box 0 c eee eee 10 28 External Data Selection Criteria Dialog Box 000 c cece nee 10 30 External Data Search Dialog Box 0 00 ccc tte eens 10 31 Search Results Dialog Box 0 ccc teens 10 33 Sort Preferences Dialog Box 00 cece cece ete ene nes 10 35 Creating an Archive Definition 00 00 nee 10 36 p Archiving Data nolle n dans bep ase Ue qur deese deed 10 38 Viewing Archived Data lsiseeeeeeeeee eh 10 39 Searching Archived Data llisseeseeeeseeeee e 10 43 Restoring Archived Data 42s cea cies RR ORO CK o CREER C
85. 005 Overview Overview In this chapter Communications feature Send process Using Communications This chapter explains how to use communications with Gentran Server The Communications feature enables you to send and receive data from your trading partners Gentran Server uses the Communicator to handle your communication needs The following describes the system process that occurs when you send an interchange Stage Description 1 The documents in the selected interchange are batched into EDI envelopes and the required information including control numbers is generated from the information in the partner profile After the interchange is built it is listed in the Interchange browser Reference See Viewing Interchanges on page 7 10 for more information Communication is established with the remote end The status of the message is updated based on the success or failure of the communications session Ifthe communication fails because there is no mailbox set up or the Mailbox service is not started the interchange and documents are left in a Ready to send status Ifcommunication fails because there is no modem the interchange and documents are left in a Queued status Note No user action is required at this point Interchanges that failed to send are automatically sent as part of the next transmission session After a successful communications session the documents are
86. 005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 3 1 CHAPTER 3 Using Partners Contents kc DONC TOUS sennie E e AURA CURA 3 3 Using Partner Profiles 0 ccc cece cece ce cece rere nnn nn 3 4 b OVCIVICW eceesio petty B RERR XR Mere Pere tie br es 3 4 Partner Editor Dialog Box 1 0 0 0 ccc eee 3 6 Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box 3 8 Inbound Relationship Dialog Box 0205 3 10 Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box 3 15 Inbound Group Select Dialog Box 05 3 23 Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box 00 0 0 eee ee 3 25 Inbound Interchange Select Dialog Box 3 29 Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box 3 31 Outbound Relationship Dialog Box 000 3 35 Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box 3 40 Outbound Group Select Dialog Box 0 005 3 44 Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box 00 0000 3 45 Outbound Interchange Select Dialog Box 3 50 Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box 3 52 Creating a Partner Definition 0 eese 3 56 Creating an Inbound Relationship 4 3 58 Creating an Outbound Relationship 3 66 Editing and Deleting Partner Definitions 3 76 Routing Partner P
87. 4 digital certificate 1 4 1 5 digital signature 1 4 Docs in Interchange 1 5 Document Editor 1 4 Document Type Definition 1 5 documents 1 5 1 17 opening 4 35 turnaround 1 17 using 4 1 viewing 4 51 double click 1 5 DTD 1 5 E EANA 1 5 EDI 1 5 standard 1 5 EDI Director Window 1 6 EDIA 1 5 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 EDIFACT 1 5 editing calendar 11 43 partner locations 3 118 partners 3 76 process control session 11 12 element 1 5 component 1 2 composite 1 3 envelope 1 6 BAT 3 73 BG 3 75 GS 3 73 ICS 3 75 ISA 3 75 MHD 3 70 ST 3 70 STX 3 75 UNA 3 75 UNB 3 75 UNG 3 73 UNH 3 70 export 1 6 External Data External Data Filter Dialog Box 6 6 External Data Summary Viewer 6 3 sorting 6 9 viewing 6 8 External Data Filter Dialog Box 6 6 External Data Summary Viewer 6 3 F fail over 1 7 finding 1 7 functional group 1 7 BAT 3 73 GS 3 73 UNG 3 73 G GENTRAN Director introduction 1 2 navigation 1 6 getting started 1 1 getting support 1 xi 1 2 GS functional group 3 73 H header 1 7 f Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 I ICS envelope 3 75 import 1 7 importing partner profile 3 56 In Documents 1 7 In Drawer 1 7 interchange 1 7 interchanges attaching to partner 7 16 documents within viewing 6 10 7 14 using 6 1 7 1 viewing 6 8 7 10 Interchanges browser 1 7 Internal System User 3 103 3 105 3 106 3 109 3 111 3 117 3 118 3 119 ISA envelope 3 75 L lab
88. 53 and 2000 02 14 13 02 58 j Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Mailbox Search dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Mailbox Select a mailbox default is All Location Choose Both Inbox and Outbox Inbox or Outbox Status Select the status of the messages to be archived Valid values All default Sent Read Delivered Picked Up Sent Third Party Content type Select the content type of the messages The default is Any but you can type in any content type you have created Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Mailbox Search Dialog Box 10 27 Part Function Created Between Define a created between range of dates and times to search in YY Y Y MM DD and HH MM SS format Note Click the arrow to access the calendar control Sent Between Define a sent between range of dates and times to search in YY Y Y MM DD and HH MM SS format Note Click the arrow to access the calendar control Received Between Define a received between range of dates and times to search in YY YY MM DD and HH MM SS format Note Click the arrow to access the calendar control Find Finds the appropriate messages based on the criteria you selected and displays them in the Search R
89. Alias Value box type criteria that the system will use to distinguish this relationship from others during the application import function Click Save to save your selections and return to the Outbound Relationship dialog box Selecting an outbound functional group On the Outbound Relationship dialog box click Groups to display a list of existing groups System response The system displays the Outbound Group Select Dialog Box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Outbound Relationship Using Partners 3 72 Step Action Is the required group in the Groups list Ifyes select the group Or if you are not using groups select lt none gt Then click Select Continue with Selecting an outbound interchange on page 3 73 System response This action selects the highlighted group and returns you to the Outbound Relationship dialog box Ifno continue with the next step to create the group On the Outbound Group Select dialog box click New System response The system displays the Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box In the Description box type the group description In the Functional Group ID box type the identification of the functional group Note The EDI standards define which functional group ID should be used for each type of document If you have more complex requ
90. Bld SYS Dee FGBuild GS Build Templa SYS New Import PETES21INV Yes Import PET T ANADOT Yes Import 810junk2 No Import PET_810 No Import PET x 3030810 Yes Import Flat_File_To_XC No Import PET x 3030810 Yes Import PETE 92 1 INV Yes Import PET T ANAOO1 No Import Flat File To XC Yes Fa Refresh b Close 1 selected selecte Help ii 443 Translation Parts and The following lists the parts of the EDI Translation Object browser and their functions functions Part Function Type Describes the type of translation object defined such as export import or system import Description Displays a description that further identifies the translation object Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 EDI Translation Object Browser Using Translation Objects Ze Part Function Used Indicates whether the translation object is currently associated with an Inbound or Outbound Partner Relationship Valid values are Yes Indicates the translation object is in use No Indicates the translation object is not in use SYS Indicates a system translation object that is in use SYS Indicates a system translation object that is not in use Note If a translation object is currently used associated with an Inbound or Outbound Partner Relationsh
91. COMS Diagram The following illustrates the Inbound Group Select dialog box Inbound Group Select PETZONE x Groups Select Inbound X3030 PO Grp Exit New asea j ej Delete Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Inbound Group Select dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Groups Displays all functional group definitions established for this trading partner Select Selects the indicated functional group to be used with this relationship Note Select lt none gt if the standard you are using does not require groups and you do not want to use one Exit Exits the Inbound Group Select dialog box New Displays the Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box which allows you to create a new group Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Inbound Group Select Dialog Box 3 24 Using Partners Part Function Edit Displays the Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected group Delete Removes the selected group from the system Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box Introduction The Inbound Group Entry dialog box is used to specify a functional group definitio
92. CS P O INVOIC EDIFACT INVOIC ORDERS EDIFACT ORDERS INVOIC 3Tradacoms INVOIC ORDERS Tradacoms ORDERS This element is located in ANSI X12 GS01 EDIFACT UNGOI TRADACOMS BAT Sequence Checking Specify if inbound sequence checking will be used and whether the type of sequence checking will be incremental or chronological You can also indicate that the system must check for duplicate control numbers None Do not use sequence checking Duplicate Check for duplicate control numbers Incremental The control number must be one greater than the last number Chronological The control number must be greater than the last number Note If the system detects duplicate control numbers or detects incremental or chronological control numbers that are out of sequence those documents will be put in the In Documents Last Used Group Control Number Specifies a value that the system will use to sequence check the group control number The number will be replaced by the group control number that the system receives This box will initially be set to zero Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box 3 27 Part Function Acknowledge Instructs the system to send a functional acknowledgement Group to this trading partner when you receive the group defined in this relationsh
93. Calendar Iv Sun M Mon Tue M Wed IV Thu M Fi v Sat Date Event Setup The following lists the parts of the Event Setup dialog box and their functions dialog box parts and functions Part Function Description Enter a description of the event Session Select one of the sessions you defined on the Sessions tab Controller Specify the name of the controller on which the event is run Notification Type Event Designate this event as a notify type which means that the system executes it based on parameters set in the Notification Log Note Selecting this check box deactivates the Timed and Polled tabs Timed tab Start Indicate the beginning run time of a session Note You must enter the time in 24 hour HH MM format If you do not enter the time in this format the system attempts to determine the correct 24 hour time from what you entered Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 11 20 Using Process Control Part Function Until Specify a stop time for the event Note You can either use 24 hour HH MM format or 12 hour HH MM or H MM format with the aM designator a am or p pm Note An event will always execute on its end time regardless of the interval that 1s set To have an event execute once do not enter an end time or interval Minutes Speci
94. CrossRef Entry dialog box enables you to create a new table item Diagram The following illustrates the CrossRef Entry dialog box CrossRef Entry PETZONE Lx Table Name PRODCODE f i My Value Exit Partner Value Help Description pe n Reference Data Parts and The following lists the parts of the CrossRef Entry dialog box and their functions functions Part Function My Value Specify your data value that corresponds to your partner s data value Partner Value Specify your partner s data value that corresponds to your data value Description Specify a description of the codes Reference Data Specify up to four values that can be mapped when they are associated with a specific code value Note These boxes are not currently used by Gentran Server Save Saves the modified information Exit Help Exits the CrossRef Entry dialog box Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Lookup Select Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Parts and functions Table Name rem Edit Delete Help Lookup Select Dialog Box The Lookup Select dialog box contains all lookup partner tables The following illustrates the Lookup Select dialog box Lookup Select PETZONE PRODCODE ES Me mu tee The following lists the parts of the Lookup Select
95. Diagram The following illustrates the Import File Select dialog box Import File Select 21 xj Look in a Partners amp e File name par Files of type Import Files par Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Import File Select dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Look in Select the folder where the system should look for the file Displays the current folder File name Specify the name of the file to be imported Files of type Select the type of file Note The default file extension for partners is par Open Begins the import process for the selected partner file Cancel Cancels the action and exits the dialog box Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Export File Build Dialog Box Export File Build Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Parts and functions The Export File Build dialog box enables you to specify the name of a partner export file and begins the export process The following illustrates the Export File Build dialog box Export File Build 27 xi Save in Spates sts Bl ce File name PETZONE par F E Save as type Export Files par J Cancel Help The following lists the parts of the Export File Build dialog box and their functions Part Function Save in Select the folder
96. Dialog Box 1 2 0 0 0 0 cece 3 50 Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box 0 0 ccc eects 3 52 Creating a Partner Definition 0 2 0 00 een eee 3 56 Creating an Inbound Relationship 0 c eee eens 3 58 Creating an Outbound Relationship 2 0 eee 3 66 Editing and Deleting Partner Definitions 0 0 c eee eee 3 76 Routing Partner Profiles 4 2 d oho c e e ne n T eR RC eee aga 3 78 Import File Select Dialog Box ssleeseeeseeee III 3 78 Export File Build Dialog Box seseseeseeeee eh 3 79 Partner Copy Dialog Box 0 cece n 3 81 Importing Partner Profiles 0 ccc cece eens 3 85 Exporting Partner Profiles 0 2 0 0 ccc cette eens 3 87 Copying Partner Profiles 0 0 0 cect nee eens 3 88 Using Partner Tables isc ei even ex RA draws wed ake eee awaawos 3 92 MERO iU E RORR CT TECTA 3 92 Partner Tables Dialog Box 0 0 ett cnet ees 3 93 New Table Dialog Box 0 0 ern 3 94 CrossRef Select Dialog Box 00 cece cette eens 3 95 CrossRef Entry Dialog Box 0 eect e eens 3 96 Lookup Select Dialog Box 0 0c ene 3 97 Lookup Entry Dialog Box 0 2 eect n 3 98 Table Export File Build Dialog Box 0 00 3 99 Table Import File Select Dialog Box 3 101 Creating Partner Tables 0 0 cece ccc ee 3 103 Editing Partner Tables
97. ETTENH MyCollectl 72 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 26 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 73 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 27 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 74 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 28 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 75 Dutbox 01 06 00 15 15 33 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 76 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 34 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 77 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 35 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 78 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 36 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 79 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 45 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 80 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 47 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 62 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 04 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 63 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 05 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 64 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 06 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 65 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 09 MRTETTENH MyColect 66 Dutbox 01 06 00 15 15 14 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 67 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 16 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 68 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 17 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 69 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 18 MRTETTENH MyExtractl 70 Inbox 01 06 00 15 15 04 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 71 Dutbox 01 06 00 15 15 25 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 72 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 26 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 73 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 27 x Mark All Previous Nest MerksU manie Help Close Parts and The following lists the parts of the Search Results dialog box and their functions functions Part Function list Displays context specific information depending on whether you searched for interchanges groups documents messages or external data Mark All Marks all items in the Search Results dialog bo
98. External Data Partners In Drawer Archive Restored Dala Help Exit Status Bar The Desk Main Toolbar Main Menu Bar Browser Toolbar Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Getting Started Navigating in Gentran Server Components The following are the components of the main Gentran Server window Control menu The Control Menu contains the following commands Restore Move Size Minimize Maximize and Close Title Bar The Title Bar contains the name of the application and on the Gentran Server desktop it displays the name of the system you are logged in to You can use this to move the position of the Gentran Server EC Manager window on your desktop Minimize Maximize buttons The Minimize button reduces the window to an icon The Maximize button enlarges the window to its maximum size Main menu bar The Main Menu Bar contains the drop down menus Detailed descriptions of each of the commands on these menus are found in the Online Help Unavailable items are dimmed Main toolbar The Main Toolbar gives you access to some of the most common browsers and functions in Gentran Server Unavailable items are dimmed The Main Toolbar is a dockable toolbar so you can affix it to any edge of the EC Manager window The following illustrates the Main Toolbar Workspace Restored a Send and Process Forms Out Documents Interchanges J Receive Con
99. For example if there are no translation objects for ANSI X12 version 003040 registered with Gentran you will not be able to select that version on this dialog box The information required for this dialog box should be provided to you by your trading partner when this partner defines the details of the transactions they send you If you need to define parameters to comply with the processing needs of your partner such as Sequence Checking Last Used Control Duplicate Documents or Generate Acknowledgement click Advanced System response The system displays the Advanced fields on the Inbound Relationship dialog box Selecting an inbound translation object On the Inbound Relationship dialog box click Translation System response The system displays the Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box From the drop down lists select the translation objects required for this inbound relationship Note The lists display all translation objects registered in the system that are appropriate for the type of translation object such as Export or Print and the transaction set Ifthere are no translation objects displayed in the drop down lists no translation objects of that type are registered for the version of the document defined in the relationship Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Creating
100. Function Interchanges Displays all interchange definitions established for this trading partner Select Selects the indicated interchange to be used with this relationship Note Select lt none gt if the standard you are using does not require interchanges and you do not want to use one Exit Exits the Inbound Interchange Select dialog box New Displays the Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box which allows you to create a new interchange Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Interchange Select Dialog Box 3 51 Part Function Edit Displays the Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected interchange Delete Removes the selected interchange from the system Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Using Partners 3 52 Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Introduction The Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box is used to specify a new interchange definition Note EDIFACT version 4 defines the infrastructure necessary to support the creation and processing of interchanges that have been encoded using a character set other than 8 bit ASCII Gentran Server for Windows supports the processing of an encoded interchange as long as the encodin
101. Guide Using Partners Editing Partner Tables 3 105 Editing Partner Tables Procedure To edit a partner table complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System User for which you want to modify a Cross reference or Lookup table Click Tables System Response The system displays the Partner Tables Dialog Box Select the table you want to modify Click Edit System response Displays either the CrossRef Select Dialog Box or Lookup Select Dialog Box depending on the type of table Select the item you want to modify Click Edit System response Displays either the CrossRef Entry Dialog Box or Lookup Entry Dialog Box depending on the type of table Modify the entry After you finish modifying all necessary table entries click Save System Response The system returns to the Cross reference or Lookup Select dialog box Click Exit System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Deleting Entries in a Partner Table Using Partners 3 106 Deleting Entries in a Partner Table Procedure To delete entries in a partner table complete the following steps Step
102. Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 EN Defining Outbound Acknowledgement Criteria Using Acknowledgements Defining Outbound Acknowledgement Criteria Introduction Reconciling documents and their acknowledgements is a function that the system automatically performs for you The translation objects that are necessary to process the acknowledgements you receive are included as system translation objects and are registered when you install Gentran Server However you must establish the level of acknowledgements that you expect by completing the Partner Editor Outbound Relationship dialog boxes Note If you are receiving functional acknowledgements as a result of sending documents for an outbound relationship you must set up the corresponding inbound relationship to receive the acknowledgements you expect to receive Reference See Creating an Inbound Relationship on page 3 58 for information about how to establish an inbound relationship to receive acknowledgements Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Acknowledgements Defining Outbound Acknowledgement Criteria Procedure To set up the level of acknowledgements that you expect to receive from your partners complete the following steps Step Action 1 The requirement for receiving interchange acknowledgements is set in the Advanced section of the Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box as i
103. November 2005 Importing Partner Tables 3 112 Using Partners Step Action Click Open to begin the import process Note When the export process is complete the system displays an informational dialog box Click OK System Response The system returns to the Partner Tables dialog box Click Exit System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Overview 3 113 Using Partner Locations Overview Introduction Necessary parameters Before you begin Each partner profile may have many associated location tables The location tables may contain address and contact related information about the partner You can use location tables in many different ways Locations are referenced in translation objects through one of the location keys reference codes Locations are used only if you use a translation object that specifically accesses those locations Example You may need a list of a partner s store addresses warehouse addresses or invoice to addresses Any or all of these can be stored in a location table You must set up two parameters that contain the following information The name ofthe trading partner location The reference codes that the system uses to identify this location These parameters are used to create a partner location Before se
104. On the Active Events tab all currently processing events and the controller on which each event are being processed are listed in the Event list on the left side of the dialog Session list The Session list on the right side of the Active Events tab displays the session script for the event that is currently selected in the Events list The Session list also contains all of the parameters for each command This detailed view enables you to see which programs are currently being executed by the Gentran Executive The session command that is currently being processed is indicated with a green arrow Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Viewing Events 11 33 Procedure To view all events complete the following steps viewing all events Step 1 Action Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Click the Events tab to display the event options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Events tab If you want to filter events by the controller on which the events are run select that controller from the Controller list Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Use the following table to select the appropriate sort key from the Sort list THEN select this from IF you want to sort by the Sort list the events
105. RANTY IS EXPRESSED AND NONE SHALL BE IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE OR FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE The applicable Sterling Commerce entity reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and to make changes in the content hereof without the obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or changes The Third Party Software is provided AS IS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED FURTHER IF YOU ARE LOCATED OR ACCESSING THIS SOFTWARE IN THE UNITED STATES ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY REGARDING TITLE OR NON INFRINGEMENT ARE DISCLAIMED Sterling Commerce Inc 4600 Lakehurst Court Dublin OH 43016 2000 614 793 7000 Copyright 1995 2005 Sterling Commerce Inc Table of Contents Preface About this Guide Introduction sssseeeeeee hh e hee viii What s in this Manual 00 e a ix b Getting Support ie ches cae ies ead Anena EATUR Ab he ed eee sy Read da be A xi Chapter 1 Getting Started Introducing Gentran Server for Windows 002 cece eee ee eens 1 2 Navigating in Gentran Server 0 0 cece cece neee 1 6 Gentran Server Data Translation Process 00 cece eee teens 1 9 Changing your Password 2 0 cece e 1 14 Chapter 2 Using Translation Object
106. RARE S UR s e oie 4 53 UnPosting Documents sesleeseeeele een neee 4 54 Responding to Documents 00 0 cece cent nen enees 4 55 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Chapter 5 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Importing Documents sssseeeeeeee e eet ene eae 4 57 Exporting Documents 2 0 0c cece cnet eee nee eae 4 59 Using Communications Tu m m 5 2 Send Queue Browser 0 en eee hh 5 3 Communications Session Dialog Box ccc cect een ene 5 4 Process File Dialog Box 0 cece turti e n NEV nE EEES E PEE 5 5 Sending DOCUMENL wks cowie severe ERER wad EE AERE IA RE OR E 5 6 Sending All Documents lssesseseeeeeeeee n 5 7 Resending Documents 0 cc ccc ha 5 9 Recerving Documents sessin eretia RN Oe EE aee EAE ESE EES 5 11 Viewing the Send Queue 1 ttn nen eens 5 13 Processing Data Files eroe cee ede ned E bU ROSE E DERE nde bears 5 14 Using External Data OVerView over en ep EP REPRMUHPERPE ete Peed baa Dr bee hd eS 6 2 External Data Summary Viewer 0 0 c cee teen nee 6 3 External Data Filter Dialog Box 0 cette ene 6 6 Viewing External Data Files 0 0 ect t tenes 6 8 Filtering External Data Files 2 0 0 cece teens 6 9 Using Interchanges OVeEVIeW ou caes BA ene RU wae UA P DAG AH Nk REA iut etse E P s 7 2 Interchanges Browser
107. Transl Obj lists unless you are certain of the result Note If the acknowledgement is overdue it is not received within the number of hours designated in the Hours Overdue box it is indicated with a status of Overdue on the Interchanges Browser Reference See Selecting an outbound functional group on page 3 71 for more information about setting parameters on the Outbound Group Entry dialog box See Viewing Documents within Interchanges on page 7 14 for instructions on how to access the Interchanges browser Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Acknowledgements Defining Outbound Acknowledgement Criteria E Step Action 3 The requirement for receiving transaction set acknowledgements is set in the Advanced section of the Outbound Relationship Dialog Box as illustrated below Last Used Control Number 0000 Expect Acknowledgement F Duplicate Documents HOGUTSTETUE fp Test Indicator C Test Production Reference See Finalizing the outbound relationship on page 3 75 for more information about setting parameters on the Outbound Relationship dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Manually Acknowledging Documents Using Acknowledgements 8 10 Manually Acknowledging Documents Introduction The Acknowledge function does not genera
108. Z 05 11 2002 12 20 Pr 5 3 4 PETZONE dx 0004 PETZ ocument Summary rading Partner PETZONE DIK Parts and The following lists the parts of the Interchanges browser and their functions functions Part Function Status bar Reflects the filer specifications from the Interchange Filter Dialog Box Note The Electronic Commerce Manager status bar is updated when you select a single item from the middle pane left pane Displays a list of all the interchanges groups and Interchanges tree documents that were sent or received Also displays the time created and partner name Note To refresh the display of the Interchanges browser press FS Reference See the following for more information Information organization on page 7 3 Document level status icons on page 7 7 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Interchanges Browser Using Interchanges Part Function middle pane detailed list Displays a detailed list of the selected interchange group or document The information displayed depends on the level Notes To select multiple items press and hold the CTRL key while selecting the items Torefresh the display of the Interchanges browser right click the middle pane and select Refresh from the shortcut menu or press F5 upper right pane External Data Displays the data f
109. a single item is selected from the detailed list Reference See Error Messages in the Administration Guide for a detailed explanation of translator reports Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 LE Restored Interchanges Browser Using Archive and Restore 10 50 Document level The following lists the status icons that the system may use at the document level status icons on the Restored Interchanges browser Status Icon Description OK es green Indicates that the documents are fully compliant with the EDI standard and are eligible for further processing NotOK i red Indicates one of the following red g The document failed to comply with the EDI standard If this is the cause of the error the errors will be indicated on a translator report associated with the document Although the document is not fully compliant it is eligible for further processing The received document could not be associated with a specific trading partner If this is the case the partner listed for the document will be Unknown To associate this document and the other documents received in the interchange with a partner attach the documents from the Interchange browser A suitable trading relationship or translation object could not be associated with the document Detailed information concerning what information was used to locate the relationship and or the
110. about setting parameters on the Inbound Relationship dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Acknowledgements Defining Inbound Acknowledgement Criteria Step Action 2 Functional Group acknowledgement criteria is defined when you set up the Inbound Group Entry using the Advanced options on the Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box as illustrated below Sequence Checking Las Used Group Control Number eee None o Duplicate Ack Transaction Set ID Incremental zj Chronological Group Transl Obj Y Acknowledge Transl Obj amp CKBUILD CONTRL Reference See Selecting an inbound functional group for more information about setting parameters on the Inbound Group Entry dialog box 3 Interchange acknowledgement criteria is defined when you set up the Inbound Interchange Entry using the Advanced options on the Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box as illustrated below Seguence Checking Last Used Control Humber None C Duplicate Ack Tirensaction Set ID Incremental Chronological Acknowledge Interchange Interchange Transl Obj Acknowledge Transl Obj Reference See Selecting an inbound interchange on page 3 64 for more information about setting parameters on the Inbound Interchange Entry dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s
111. al For TRADACOMS the Interchange is required and there is no functional group Note If you do not want to use an optional functional group or interchange you must still select none from the appropriate dialog box to alert the system that you are not using a group Before setting up an inbound relationship you must know the following information to plan the implementation of this partner The EDI standard you expect from this trading partner such as ANSI The standard version you expect from this trading partner such as 003020 for ANSI or 090001 for EDIFACT The code for the transaction set you expect from this trading partner such as INVOIC for an EDIFACT invoice The type of functional group and interchange the transaction set is wrapped in when it is received from this partner After you complete your implementation planning for this partner you can set up the inbound relationship by using the Inbound Relationship dialog box The Inbound Relationship dialog box controls other subordinate dialog boxes where you define everything that is necessary to establish the relationship The following describes the process for defining an inbound relationship Stage Description 1 Create a new inbound relationship 2 Create and register the inbound translation object to be used with this relationship Reference See the Application Integration User s Guide for more information about creating a t
112. al selected from the View External Data menu Data Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using External Data External Data Summary Viewer Part Function middle right pane Gentran Data Displays the associated document in EDI format if this option is selected from the View External Data menu Note This option is not available if the document used in translation does not exist lower right pane Export Document Summary Translator Report Displays a report of the external actions the translator took on this document and lists any EDI or translation object based compliance errors if this option is selected from the View External Data menu Reference See Error Messages in the Administration Guide for more information Icons The following lists the icons that the system uses on the External Data Summary Viewer Icon Description e Indicates a process file or mailbox process file system activity Ea Indicates a send system activity Indicates an import or mailbox import system activity Indicates an export system activity Indicates an interchange related to the external data file ED E IS E Note Indicates a document related to the external data file If this icon is red it indicates that the document contains errors Gentran Server for Windows User s Guid
113. an Inbound Relationship Step Action If you selected an Export File translation object and you want to export to a specific file type the universal naming convention UNC name of that file in the Export File Name box Do you want to use the Export to Mailbox function to specify a mailbox and E mail address so the output of the inbound translation object can be delivered directly back to the Mailbox Server Manager Ifyes select Export to Mailbox and complete the appropriate boxes Continue with the next step Reference See Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box on page 3 15 for more information Ifno continue with the next step Click Save to save your selections and return to the Inbound Relationship dialog box Selecting an inbound functional group On the Inbound Relationship dialog box click Groups to display a list of existing groups System response The system displays the Inbound Group Select Dialog Box Is the required group in the Groups list Ifyes select the group Or if you are not using groups select lt none gt Then click Select Continue with Selecting an inbound interchange on page 3 64 System response This action selects the highlighted group and returns you to the Inbound Relationship dialog box Ifno continue with the next step to create the group On the Inbound Group Select dialog box click New System response The system displays th
114. an Server for Windows November 2005 GL 2 authorization Permission to access a protected resource service or sensitive information browser A window that displays a list of items such as documents transaction sets interchanges or translation objects A document browser displays only documents click Indicates that you should position your cursor on top of the designated item and press and release your primary mouse button The primary mouse button is the button you access with your index finger regardless of whether you are using right handed or left handed mouse operation cluster A set of computers that work together to provide a service The use of a cluster enhances both the availability and scalability of the service The Windows operating systems provide a software solution for clustering multiple computers running networked client server applications communications Everything sent and received to from one telephone number in one continuous session period of connection This could include sending two or three interchange envelopes to a network each for a different trading partner Communicator The Gentran Server communications software The Communicator enables you to send receive resend establish communication port definitions establish communication profiles establish communication scripts and view and delete communication sessions compliance An implementation is compliant if and only if it fully meets ea
115. andard to be used in this relationship Note Only standards for which you have existing translation objects are displayed This box cannot be changed for an existing relationship Selection of this box is mandatory Valid values A TRADACOMS C CII D NCPDP E EDIFACT O ODETTE P OTHER R ROSETTANET T TDCC U UCS V VDA X X12 Parts and functions functions Part Relationship Description Standard Version Select the EDI standard version to be used in this relationship Note Only versions of the selected standard for which you have existing translation objects are displayed If this box 1s changed for an existing relationship all of the information defined below it is cleared and must be reselected Selection of this box is mandatory Transaction Set Select the transaction set to be used in this relationship Note Only transaction sets for the selected version for which you have existing translation objects are displayed If this box 1s changed for an existing relationship all ofthe information defined below it is cleared and must be reselected Selection of this box is mandatory Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f Inbound Relationship Dialog Box 3 12 Using Partners Part Function Release Select the release number to be used in this relationship Note Only releas
116. ange and all associated documents Delete from the Document menu Notes If you delete an interchange with a status of Queued you receive a warning that you must remove specified messages from Out Documents and from your trading partner s Inbox If you proceed you are warned that if your partner bases processing results on control number sequencing you should modify the transaction group and interchange control numbers If you delete an interchange with a status of Ready to send you are warned that if your partner bases processing results on control number sequencing you should modify the transaction group and interchange control numbers Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Filtering the Display of Restored Interchanges D 10 53 Filtering the Display of Restored Interchanges Procedure To filter restored interchanges by partner and or date complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Restored Interchanges System response The system displays the Restored Interchanges Browser From the Commands menu select Filter System response The system displays the Interchange Filter Dialog Box Do you want the system to filter the display of interchanges by date and time Ifno select the No Date Time Checking check box and proceed with step 6
117. anges browser Procedure Use this procedure to attach an interchange to a partner Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Interchanges System response The system displays the Interchanges Browser Select one interchange Does the partner already exist Ifyes continue with step 4 Ifno you must create the partner before you can continue Reference See Creating a Partner Definition on page 3 56 for instructions From the Document menu select Attach System response The system displays the Select Partner dialog box Select the desired partner from the list and click OK System response The system links the selected interchange to this partner and returns to the Interchanges browser Does the partner to which you are attaching the interchange have more than one interchange definition Ifyes you are prompted with an additional dialog box Continue with the next step Ifno continue with Step 8 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Interchanges Attaching Interchanges to a Partner 7 17 Step Action 7 Use the following table to determine what to select on the dialog box If your partner has more 1 Select the appropriate interchange than one interchange definition definition 2 Click OK If your partner has more l Select the appropriat
118. ansaction set send This function enables you to manually start a communications session to send data to your trading partner Only selected documents are enveloped and sent If no documents are selected a documents are sent Successfully sent documents are moved to the Out Drawer Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 10 Send Queue set sort status This function enables you to display a list of documents currently queued to be sent See Transaction Set This function enables you to sort the list of documents in a document browser into one of the following sequences partner type name partner name type type partner name The processing stage of a document or interchange indicated in the Status box In Documents NotOK All documents in the In Documents have this status This code indicates one of the following The document failed to comply with the EDI standard If this is the cause of the error the errors are indicated on a translator report associated with the document Despite the fact that the document is not fully compliant it is eligible for further processing Thereceived document could not be associated with a specific trading partner If this is the case the partner listed for the document in question is Unknown To associate this document and the other documents received in the interchange with a partner attac
119. anslation object for the transaction set must be Loaded into the system and registered Set up as the Export translation object in the inbound relationship record for the partner Notes After performing an export command any subsequent exports to the same export file increases the size of the file by appending the new external data to this file Ifyou set up the Export to Mailbox command on the Inbound Translation Objects dialog box the document is exported to the mailbox you specify References For additional information see the following Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box on page 3 40 Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box on page 3 15 setting up the Export to Mailbox function Procedure To export a document complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the In Documents Browser In Documents Browser or In Drawer Browser System response The system displays the appropriate summary dialog box for the selected browser 2 Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the appropriate document browser 3 Select the document or documents that are to be exported and click Export System response The system displays the Select Export Method Dialog Box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guid
120. artners Part Function Turn Around Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the transaction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required You must select a translation object from the TurnAround list if you have created a specific turnaround translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner relationship Note TurnAround translation objects may not be appropriate for an Outbound Relationship Export Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the transaction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required You must select a translation object from the Export list 1f you have created a specific export translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner relationship Export translation objects are used to export an outbound document to a file Transaction Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the tran
121. ase defined by the relationship Print Displays all print translation objects in the system for the Standard Version Transaction Set and Release defined by the relationship The selected translation object will be used to print documents sent to this partner Data Entry Application ID Application Alias Value Displays all screen entry translation objects in the system for the Standard Version Transaction Set and Release defined by the relationship Specify the application identifier that indicates the destination of the documents Specify the criteria for this relationship definition which will be used during the application import function Example The application contains data that can generate either an invoice or a credit memo Use one relationship definition for invoices and another for credit memos There is a box in the application that defines whether this is an invoice or a credit memo The box will display CREDIT if a credit memo is created and INVOICE if an invoice is created Type CREDIT in the Application Alias Value for the relationship defining the credit memo or INVOICE for the invoice Note This box will only be used if you receive translation objects that are defined to use the Application Alias Value Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box 3 42 Using P
122. ata Diagram The following illustrates the Communications Session dialog box Communication Session Eg Select the mailbox you wish to communicate with JGENTRAN Application CIGENTRAN Tutorial Cancel Parts and The following lists the parts of the Communications Session dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Select the Displays the list of Gentran Server mailboxes mailbox you wish to communicate with OK Exits the dialog box starts a communication session for the selected mailbox or mailboxes Cancel Cancels the function exits the dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Communications Process File Dialog Box Process File Dialog Box Introduction The Process File feature allows you to invoke the post communications process with any EDI file as if the file was received via a communications session Diagram The following illustrates the Process File dialog box Look in E Tutorial x f e a Pet eord tpl ja Peteinvs stp a Pettinvs stp a Pettstt int a Pet tinv map jt Peteinvs tpl jt Pettinvs tpl t Pettstt2 int ia Pet tinv tpl t Peteordp stp at Pettordp stp ja Petzone p Pet_tiny txt a Peteordp tpl jt Pettordp tpl ja Petzonel a Pet tord map je Pettest int gt Pettstel int ja Petzone2 a Pet tord tpl a Pettest2 int a P
123. ay Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Translation Objects EDI Translation Object Browser Part Function Close Exits the EDI Translation Object browser Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Register Translation Object Dialog Box Using Translation Objects 2 6 Register Translation Object Dialog Box Introduction The Register Translation Object dialog box enables you to register a selected translation object file with Gentran Server identify the translation object to the system Diagram The following illustrates the Register Translation Object dialog box Register Translation Object 121 xi Look jn a Trans bi 7 amp l ek File name 1 Files of type Translation Objects tpl Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Register Translation Object dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Look in Specify the drive and folder where the file 1s located File name Specify the name of the file that you want to register Files of type Specify the type of file that you want to access Note The file extension for translation objects is TPL Open Selects the chosen file and exits the Open dialog box Cancel Exits the Open dialog box without selecting a file Help Accesses
124. c refresh so you do not have to click Refresh is enabled checked The default interval for refreshing the Event list is 10 seconds The default for refreshing the display of the Session list is 2 seconds Ifthe Active Events tab has not been refreshed after an event has expired is no longer active the system displays the event on the Active Events tab even though it is inactive until the Active Events tab is refreshed System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 DJ Activating and Suspending Events Using Process Control 11 36 Activating and Suspending Events Introduction The Events tab of the Gentran Server Process Control dialog enables you to change the status of an event by activating or suspending the event The indicator in the far left column of the list on the Events tab registers the status of the event The indicator can be one of the following colors Red the event is currently executing and you are not able to edit the event until processing completes Yellow the event is suspended and is not processed until activated Green the event is activated for processing Green with red x the event is activated for processing but is currently blocked because the number of currently processing events is equal to the limit of events that may concurrent
125. ccessfully to the Workspace Browser so you can modify the document and resend it The Copy function can only be used when Out Drawer is active Note This function can result in sending duplicate documents to a trading partner Reference After you modify the documents you may want to resend them See Resending Documents on page 5 9 for more information Procedure To copy a document or group of documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the Out Drawer System response The system displays the Out Drawer Summary dialog box Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Drawer Browser Select the documents that you want to copy to the Workspace Browser and click Copy System response The selected documents are copied to the Workspace Browser Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Posting Documents Posting Documents Introduction The Post function moves a selected compliant document or group of compliant documents to the Out Documents Browser A document is compliant if it conforms to the validation rules as defined by the translation object A document is designated compliant if the Status column contains OK If the Status column contains NotOk the document is not compliant and is not posted N
126. ce to Out Documents predefined Ona data entry translation object a default value for a particular element You can change the value as necessary print This command enables you to print a formatted or unformatted version of the selected documents using the print translation object set up in the partner relationship for those documents This command also enables you to print a summary list of the documents printout Produced when data received from a trading partner passes through a print translation object You do not have to print the data it can be printed to a file on your hard disk receive This function enables you to manually initiate a communications session to receive data from your trading partner respond This function enables you to create a turnaround document using the Turn Around translation object in the partner relationship in response to one or more selected documents in the In Drawer responsible An organization that develops and updates standards for EDI communications agency These organizations include ANSI EDIA AIAG UCS and VICS segments A number of elements combined to communicate useful data For example a catalog price segment might consist of elements for item description volume price and lead time By themselves none of these elements would communicate useful information Together they provide useful information Segments are defined by the EDI standards A number of segments together form a tr
127. cessed printed or exported they are transferred to the In Drawer This browser contains a list of documents that were received and processed Contains all functional groups of documents transaction sets sent from one sender to one receiver in the same transmission This browser enables you to view a hierarchical list of all the interchanges that were sent or received It contains status information about the interchanges such as whether or not a functional acknowledgement was received and the status of that acknowledgement This browser also enables you to access the documents within the interchanges The Interchanges browser can always be accessed Descriptions of information that can be almost anything on a translation object that is not an element a keyword title or an information indicator They can also be used as information dividers such as a line of dashes Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 8 menu menu bar move network non repudiation ODETTE Out Documents Out Drawer partner Partner Editor A list of actions from which you can choose Unavailable items on a menu are dimmed to inform you they are disabled Displays the list of menus for the application This functions enables you to move a document or group of documents either from In Documents or In Documents to the In Drawer or from Out Documents to the Workspace Also known as a Third Party Network or Value Added Netw
128. cessing acknowledgement generation or reconciliation you can not delete it until this processing is complete Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents In Documents Browser 4 7 Part Function Export Accesses the Select Export Method Dialog Box which allows you to export the selected document Move Moves the selected document to the In Drawer Receive Accesses the Communication Session dialog which allows you to begin a receive only session Refresh Refreshes the display of the browser Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 In Documents Browser Using Documents In Documents Browser Introduction The In Documents browser contains a list of documents that the system received but failed compliance checking or do not have an identifiable partner or transaction set Diagram The following illustrates the In Documents browser In Documents ORDERS 1 ME E3 View Print Delete Unknown ORDERS Unknown Not0k Esport Refresh EM ET Move NEM NECEM Close Help 1 Documents 1 selected Parts and The following lists the parts of the In Documents browser and their functions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box w
129. ch and every requirement of the standards specification Specifically each transaction action or data element produced by the implementation must be valid as defined by the standard Compliance testing is the act of comparing the operation of an implementation against the specified requirements to determine compliance or noncompliance compliant This means that the document conforms to the EDI standards as defined by the translation object component data A simple data element that belongs to a composite data element Component data element elements are also called sub elements Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide composite data element cryptographic keys copy data view windows default Desk The GL 3 A data element that is made up of multiple component elements Cryptographic keys are central to cryptographic operations and must be kept secret because whoever possesses a particular key has access to any data with which the key is associated For example if a key 1s used to encrypt a file anyone with a copy of that key can decrypt the file Furthermore anyone possessing a key used to sign messages can forge that message signature This function enables you to copy one or more documents from the Out Drawer to the Workspace The following are data view windows in the Gentran Server Audit Log Document Tracking Interchange Tracking Raw data v
130. changes on page 10 53 Ifno continue with step 3 Note The Filter function enables you to filter the display of restored interchanges by date partner and direction inbound and outbound Select an interchange Use the following table to determine your next step IF you want to THEN select view the content of a Restored Interchanges from the single selected View menu and then interchange in raw EDI select Gentran Data from the data format submenu Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Restored Interchanges 10 52 Using Archive and Restore Step Action 4 contd view the corresponding external data file Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Restored Interchanges from the View menu and then select External Data from the submenu view the translator report for a single selected interchange Restored Interchanges from the View menu and then select Translator Report from the submenu print a selected interchange or a summary of interchanges Print from the File menu delete a selected interch
131. cify the partner s country Phone Specify the partner s phone number Fax Specify the partner s fax number Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Location Entry dialog box Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Creating Partner Locations 3 117 Creating Partner Locations Procedure To create partner locations complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System User for which you want to create a location Click Locations System Response The system displays the Location Select Dialog Box Click New System response The system displays the Location Entry Dialog Box In the Name box type a unique identifier that defines this location within the partner In the Reference Code 1 box type the unique identifier for the location you are defining Example The DUNS number for the location Complete the remaining boxes as necessary Note If you use Reference Code 2 it must also be unique Click Save System response Saves the location information and displays a blank Location Entry dialog box If you want to enter additional locations for th
132. clients provide the functions that are necessary to monitor and control the system The main data management component provides a graphical user interface to the following Document locations Partner profiles Communication setup and logs System Audit Log Process control setup and management Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Introducing Gentran Server for Windows Getting Started 1 4 User interface The five main components of the Gentran Server user interface client are the client following components The Electronic Commerce EC Manager window is a data management component that serves as a high level navigation tool as well as a document management tool The EC Manager also provides access to the Partner Editor the Document Editor Application Integration and Forms Integration Partner Editor allows you to define edit and delete all partner information for your company and for all of your trading partners Document Editor is your data entry tool It allows you to create modify and view documents Application Integration is a subsystem that enables you to generate import export and document turnaround translation objects Forms Integration is a subsystem that enables you to generate screen entry and print translation objects Logical The user interface client and controller components are the logical components of components the Gen
133. consists of several logical components components Gentran Server can be deployed in many ways in this environment through a combination of a database system data store process controllers communication controllers and user interface clients Mandatory components Each system must have a primary Gentran system controller system data store and a database Database The database is the relational database that Gentran Server uses to store system data This database enables multiple users to access the same data The other components of the product interact with this database using ODBC Open Database Connectivity which allows for many different database management systems on the database controller Reference See the Getting Support card to determine which database management systems have been certified for use with Gentran Server System data store The system data store serves as the repository of all shared Gentran Server data The system data store may reside on any machine that is a file server to the machines in the Gentran Server system There is only one system data store in the Gentran Server system but the associated folders and files may be distributed across multiple machines if necessary Note The machines where the system data store resides must be accessible by all machines in the Gentran Server system Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Getting Started Proces
134. create a partner definition for each partner with whom you are going to exchange data Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Overview Partner profile To complete the partner profile you need to define an inbound or outbound relationship or both Ifyou are receiving and processing information from this trading partner you need to define an appropriate inbound relationship Ifyou are sending information to this trading partner you need to define an outbound relationship You need to create a partner profile for each partner with whom you are going to exchange data Process of The following describes the partner profile creation process defining a partner profile Stage 1 Description Create the partner definition Reference See Creating a Partner Definition on page 3 56 If necessary create the inbound relationship Reference See Creating an Inbound Relationship on page 3 58 If necessary create the outbound relationship Reference See Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 Do you need to use a cross reference or lookup table with the partner relationship to supplement or convert data you enter or receive Ifyes see Creating Partner Tables on page 3 103 Ifno continue with stage 5 Do you need to use locations to contain address and contact related information about the part
135. ct view a translator report of the actions the translator took on this document Interchanges from the View menu and then Select Translator Report view the content of a single selected interchange in raw EDI data format Interchanges from the View menu and then select Gentran Data from the submenu Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu view the related external data of a single selected interchange Interchanges from the View menu and then select Related External Data from the submenu Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu print a selected document or translation report Print from the File menu delete a selected document Delete from the Document menu copy the document to the appropriate browser Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Copy from the Document menu select the appropriate browser In Documents Browser or In Documents Browser for compliant Inbound documents Workspace Browser for outbound documents from the submenu Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Reprocessing Restored Documents DA 10 57 Reprocessing Restored Documents Introduction To reprocess data fro
136. d Some dialog boxes display warnings or messages indicating why a requested task cannot be accomplished If the dialog box has a title bar you can move it to another location on your desktop To close a dialog box double click the Control menu box or select Close Active Window from the File menu digital certificate A digital certificate is a common credential that provides a means to verify identity A certificate is a set of data that identifies an entity A trusted organization assigns a certificate to an individual or an entity that associates a public key with the individual The individual or entity to which a certificate is Issued is known as the subject of that certificate The trusted organization that issues the certificate is a Certification Authority CA and is known as the certificate s issuer A trustworthy CA will only issue a certificate after verifying the identity of the certificate s subject The data in a certificate includes the public cryptographic key from the certificate subject s public private key pair digital signature The essence of public key encryption is that your data is encoded with a complex mathematical formula that returns two keys Data encrypted with the first key can only be decrypted with the second key and data encrypted with the second key can only be decrypted with the first You distribute your first key as a public key that anyone can have and keep your second key as a private key that no one but you
137. d Between Define a range of dates and times to search in YYYY MM DD and HH MM SS format for received interchanges Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f Interchange Search Dialog Box 10 16 Using Archive and Restore Part Function Processed Status Select the processed status of the interchanges to search for Valid values All default Received Sent ReadyToSend gt Queued Held SendFailed Network Status Select the network status of the interchanges to search for Valid values All default NotSent ReceivedOK ReceivedWarning ReceivedError PickedUp ThirdParty Ack Status Select the acknowledgement status of the interchanges to search for Valid values All default ReconcileNotRequired ReconcileWaiting ReconciledOK ReconciledError ReconciledPartial ReconciledReject ReconcileOverdue Sent Between Define a range of dates and times to search in YYYY MM DD and HH MM SS format for sent interchanges Note Click the arrow to access the calendar control Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Interchange Search Dialog Box 10 17 Part Function Find Finds the
138. d in the United Kingdom dates must be entered in DD MM Y Y Complete this section if the event is polled 1 Click the Polled tab on the Event Setup dialog box System response The system displays the polled options 2 In the File name box complete only one of the following Type the path and name of the file for which you want the system to check Click Browse to select the file from the appropriate drive and directory Note You can use a wildcard to specify the name of the file Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating New Events 11 26 Using Process Control Step Action From the Result list select True or False Note Ifyou select True you are indicating that the event should only be executed when the specified file is present Ifyou select False you are indicating that the event should be executed only when the specified file does rot exist Saving the event Click OK System response The event is saved and you exit the Event Setup dialog box Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Editing Events Editing Events 11 27 Introduction You are not able to edit an event unle
139. dialog box and their functions Part Function Items Displays a list of table items Exit Exits the Lookup Select dialog box New Accesses the Lookup Entry Dialog Box which allows you to create a new table item Edit Accesses the Lookup Entry Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected table item Delete Removes the selected table item Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Lookup Entry Dialog Box Using Partners 3 98 Lookup Entry Dialog Box Introduction The Lookup Entry dialog box enables you to create a new table item Diagram The following illustrates the Lookup Entry dialog box Lookup Entry PETZONE x Table Name PRODCODE 7i Lookup Value Exit Help Description pan oo Reference Data Parts and The following lists the parts of the Lookup Entry dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Lookup Value Specify the value that will be looked up in the data during inbound or outbound processing Description Specify a description of the code Reference Data Specify up to four values that can be mapped when they are associated with a specific code value Note These boxes are not currently used by Gentran Server Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the CrossRef Entry dialog box Help Displays Online Help
140. ding Events 0000 11 36 Executing an Event Immediately 2 224 11 38 rPLTT 11 39 OVetVIGW cene Vae x Ie Rx RR ig 11 39 Creating and Editing Calendars 0 000005 11 41 Deleting Calendars esee 11 43 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Introduction Using Process Control Introduction In this chapter This chapter explains how to use the Gentran Server process control Process control Process control feature enables you to automate your message processing feature Essentially you need to tell the system what you want done and when and process control takes care of it for you automatically With process control you can build customized events to initiate the processing functions of Gentran Server These processing functions include the following importing data from your application files exporting data to your application files sending receiving In addition file and process management functions can be executed that provide additional flexibility in integrating your application with Gentran Server Event creation Process control is regulated by events which are a combination of what you want process done a session and when to process a session calendar days a date or based on whether or not a file exists The following describes the event creation process Stage Description 1 Create a process control session Reference See Creating
141. documents To highlight more than one partner document type combination click on the first partner document type and then press SHIFT and click the last partner document type in the group To highlight several partner document types that are not adjacent to each other in the summary dialog box press CTRL and click the partner document types Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 In Documents Browser Using Documents In Documents Browser Introduction The In Documents browser contains a list of documents that the system received but that have not yet been processed by the user After the documents are processed printed or exported the documents are transferred to the In Drawer Diagram The following illustrates the In Documents browser In Documents PETZONE 850 2 c xi View PETZUNE hk PETZONE 1234567890 OK nint Delete Esport Move Receive gt Refresh Close 2 Documents 1 selected Help E Er pen ur EUM cur ee Parts and The following lists the parts of the In Documents browser and their functions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box which allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print the selected document Delete Deletes the selected document Note If a document is waiting for acknowledgement pro
142. e Select conditions for the command These conditions determine whether or not the command is executed within the session Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 11 6 Using Process Control Commands The following lists the script commands and their actions Note See the Gentran Server online Help for detailed information about these commands Command Action Exec Program Exec Program Ex File Copy Indicates a program for the system to run Note When this command is executed the system writes an informational message to the Audit Log indicating which program command line in working directory was run Indicates a program for the system to run and for which the system will pass the Event ID and controller name Note This function is used by the Gentran Server for RosettaNet install program Copies a file Note When this command is executed the system writes an informational message to the Audit Log indicating that the file copy was successful File Rename Changes the name of a file File Delete Removes a file from the system Note When this command is executed the system writes an informational message to the Audit Log indicating that the deletion of the file was successful GDW Archive Performs the archive command according to the specifications of a selected archive definition file GDW Audit Rpt Copies the audit records to a
143. e Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j EZ External Data Filter Dialog Box Using External Data External Data Filter Dialog Box Introduction The External Data Filter dialog box allows you to filter the display of external data files by date and system action process file mailbox process file import mailbox import send and export To access When the External Data Browser is active select Filter from the Commands menu Or from the Options menu select Preferences and click on the External Data Filter tab Diagram The following illustrates the External Data Filter dialog box External Data Filter E x External Data Filter Date From 571 2004 v amp 0000AM H 158 225PM Iv Always Current Unselect All Actions Parts and The following lists the parts of the External Data Filter dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Date From Select the beginning date and time of a date time range from which the system filters the display of external data files Note The Date From box is only active if the No Date Time Checking check box is not selected Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using External Data External Data Filter Dialog Box Part Function Date To Select the end date and time of a date time range to wh
144. e Refer to the Getting Started Guide for information about how to access the Customer Support Web site Documentation The Customer Support Web site contains a documentation library which contains the entire Gentran Server for Windows documentation set You can download the product manuals in PDF format from this library at any time Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Contents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 154 CHAPTER Getting Started Introducing Gentran Server for Windows 005 1 2 Navigating in Gentran Server 00 0c eee eee eee ee 1 6 Gentran Server Data Translation Process 005 1 9 Changing your Password 00 0 c eee eee eee eens 1 14 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 EE Introducing Gentran Server for Windows Getting Started 1 2 Introducing Gentran Server for Windows Overview Gentran Server for Windows is a combined data translation process control and communication system that operates within the Microsoft Windows environment This product is primarily designed for the translation and communication of EDI and other similar types of data Through the process control system you can integrate Gentran Server with a wide variety of business applications in a manner that makes it a complementary extension of the applications rather than a cumbersome add on System The Gentran Server system
145. e External Data folder in the System Configuration subsystem Note If you do not specify that the system should copy external data for at least one of the export import or process file functions the option to view external data is not available Reference For more information see the following Importing Documents on page 4 57 Exporting Documents on page 4 59 Using Tracking on page 9 1 Using Archive and Restore on page 10 1 System Configuration External Data Tab in the Administration Guide External data The External Data viewer enables you to do the following viewer View a list ofall external data files associated with documents or interchanges that were sent or received Filter the display of external data View external data correlated EDI data and the related translator report if they are available Note When viewing EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using External Data External Data Summary Viewer External Data Summary Viewer Introduction The External Data Summary Viewer enables you to view a list of all external data files associated with documents or interchanges that were sent or received The External Data Summary Viewer can always be accessed Information The information displayed in the Exter
146. e Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Exporting Documents 4 60 Using Documents Step Action Select one of the following options and click OK To convert all selected documents to data and write them to a single file select the Export to Single File option System response The system displays the Choose File to Export Document Dialog Box To write selected documents to the files set up in the partner inbound relationship select the Export to Default Files option To rename selected documents select the Select File by Document option System response The system displays the Choose File to Export Document Dialog Box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Contents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 5 1 CHAPTER 5 Using Communications OVetVIeW c eai t Eie eee oper mee esee PEOR ee 5 2 Send Queue Browser 0 eee ene 5 3 Communications Session Dialog Box 000000s 5 4 Process File Dialog Box 0 0 cece cece eee eens 5 5 Sending Document 0 0 ccc cece een enn 5 6 Sending All Documents 0 0 20 0 cece ee eee 5 7 Resending Documents 00 00 ce cece eee eee eee 5 9 Receiving Documents 00 cee cece ees 5 11 Viewing the Send Queue 6 eee ees 5 13 Processing Data Files 2 0 0 0 0c c ccc eens 5 14 Gentran Server for Windows November 2
147. e Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box In the Description box type the group description Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Inbound Relationship Using Partners 3 64 Step Action In the Functional Group ID box type the identification of the functional group you are specifying Note The EDI standards define which functional group ID should be used for each type of document If you have more complex requirements for processing the functional group click Advanced to display the full list of functional group setup options System response The system displays the Advanced fields on the Inbound Group Entry dialog box After you set up the required parameters in this dialog box click Save to store the information and return to the Inbound Group Select dialog box Highlight the new group Click Select System response Selects the group and returns to the Inbound Relationship dialog box Selecting an inbound interchange On the Inbound Relationship dialog box click Interchanges to display a list of existing interchanges System response The system displays the Inbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Is the required interchange in the Interchanges list Ifyes select the group Or if you are not using groups select lt none gt Then click Select Continue with Finaliz
148. e for this relationship Interchange Last Used Specify a value that will be used to generate the next Control Number Expect Acknowledgement interchange control number The number generated is always one more than the number in this box Initially this box will be set to zero Instruct the system to expect a functional acknowledgement to be received from this trading partner as a result of your partner receiving the interchange set defined in this relationship The default value for this box is not checked do not expect an acknowledgement Hours Overdue Specify how many hours must elapse before an expected functional acknowledgement is considered overdue This box is only valid if the Expect Acknowledgement box is checked The default value for this box is 48 indicating that the acknowledgement will be considered overdue in two days If you enter a value of zero in this box the acknowledgement will be immediately considered overdue Note This box is disabled if Expect Acknowledgement is not checked Interchange Transl Obj Select a partner specific Interchange Build Map translation object if this trading partner interchange deviates from the normal system behavior You must select a translation object from this list if you want the system to perform partner specific interchanging Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Interchange Transl Obj and Ackno
149. e group than one group definition definition 2 click OK If your partner has more l Select the appropriate relationship than one relationship definition defined for a document type 2 Click OK in the interchange 8 After you attach the interchange to a partner open In Documents by selecting it from the appropriate area of The Desk Note You can then export print or move the documents to the In Drawer Browser Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Resending Interchanges Using Interchanges Resending Interchanges Introduction There are two ways to resend interchanges To automatically resend all outbound interchanges you can set the Send Options preference To resend specific outbound interchanges you can use the Resend command from the Interchanges browser Note You can only resend interchanges that were previously sent or that have a status of Ready to send Resending You can set an option for the system to automatically check for interchanges that interchanges are stuck in the Send Queue The interval for checking the Send Queue is set by automatically default to 30 minutes in the Registry However you can change this value in the UPIDValidationInterval key During the first system check the Gentran Executive Service checks for interchanges that are possibly stuck and places those interchanges into a queue During the next system check the E
150. e information is optional System response The system displays one of the following dialog boxes Outbound UNH Envelope dialog box Outbound MHD Envelope dialog box Outbound ST Envelope dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Creating an Outbound Relationship Step Action Enter the appropriate information and click Save System response Saves the information and returns to the Outbound Relationship dialog box Selecting an outbound translation object On the Outbound Relationship dialog box click Translation System response The system displays the Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box From the drop down lists select the translation objects required for this outbound relationship Note The lists display all translation objects registered in the system that are appropriate for the type of translation object such as Import or Print and the transaction set Ifthere are no translation objects displayed in the drop down lists no translation objects of that type are registered for the correct version of the document defined in the relationship If you selected an Import translation object you may need to define the following Inthe Application ID box type the application identifier that indicates the destination for the documents Inthe Application
151. e system displays the Outbound Interchange Select Dialog Box 2 Is the required interchange in the Interchanges list Ifyes select the interchange Or if you are not using groups select none Then click Select Continue with Finalizing the outbound relationship on page 3 75 System response This action selects the highlighted interchange and returns you to the Outbound Relationship dialog box Ifno continue with the next step to create the interchange Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Outbound Relationship Using Partners 3 74 Step Action On the Outbound Interchange Select dialog box click New System response The system displays the Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box In the Description box type the interchange description In the Interchange ID box type the identification of the interchange Note The EDI standards define which interchange ID should be used for each type of document If you have more complex requirements for processing the interchange click Advanced System response The system displays the Advanced fields on the Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box Recommendation Do not change the translation objects in the Interchange Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason to do so Do you want to use the defaul
152. e system registers the translation object files exits the Register Translation Object dialog box Note If the selected file is invalid you receive a warning message Only valid Gentran Server translation object files can be installed If the translation object is a duplicate you are prompted with a message asking whether or not you want to overwrite the existing translation object Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Deleting Translation Objects Using Translation Objects 2 8 Deleting Translation Objects Introduction Procedure You can delete old or unused translation objects from the system only if they are not currently associated with an Inbound or Outbound Partner Relationship No in the Used column on the EDI Translation Object browser The system prevents you from deleting translation objects that are designated as system translation objects SYS or SYS Use this procedure to delete a translation object Step Action 1 From the View menu select Translation Objects System response The EDI Translation Object browser is displayed 2 Select the translation object or objects you want to delete 3 Click Delete System response The Delete confirmation dialog box is displayed 4 Do you want to delete these translation objects Ifyes click Yes to confirm the delete Ifno click No to cancel the delete request Gentran Server for Windows November 2
153. eR CR CIR CE dca 10 44 BD OVERVIEW eese cad oe e ree a eur ace Da OO ene dus park ice Das ee cod fe eei 10 44 Restored Interchanges Browser ssseseeeeeeee eee eee nes 10 46 Viewing Restored Interchanges 0 000 ccc ccc tee eens 10 51 Filtering the Display of Restored Interchanges 0 000 c eee eee 10 53 Viewing Restored Documents 0 000 c cece eet eens 10 55 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Reprocessing Restored Documents 00 cece eee eee 10 57 Resending Restored Interchanges 00 0 cece eee een ees 10 58 Chapter 11 Using Process Control Introduction lel es eed eee tenes week eee bd ee ead eee pares 11 2 SOSSIONS hve iene bei e nel x dus kee a e tes que pei eens Sa 11 3 OVEIVICW cos tego ee aee Ra Reo RU pedes S e 44 Sle acere RU a I RR rers 11 3 V Creating Sessions c p chide vo ew uere ER bee doa dawns aver ye dis 11 9 p Editing Sessions ses 6 cha deb eb mee ede ev ea dedo ede e dues 11 12 bp Deleting Sessions lllssiseseleeeee ehh 11 15 Events casa cei ae ack CERRY CR IA e ba MC CR dca Up CER ERR E 11 16 NEU Cu W errre aier e a a a a a a A R a EA EE 11 16 Creating New Events oxyde RR Ae E E E ated EE 11 23 Editing EVents cesses e Rh eR uem es Re es E EE Rh che bee Rs 11 27 Deleting Events jc ER chee ons oo da IE oda Rone EP PESE TW eds 11 31 Kk Viewing Events ius s
154. ect the transaction set to be used in this relationship Note Only transaction sets for the selected version for which you have existing translation objects are displayed If this box 1s changed for an existing relationship all ofthe information defined below it is cleared and must be reselected Selection of this box is mandatory Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Part Function Release Select the release number to be used in this relationship Note Only releases for the selected transaction set for which you have existing translation objects will be displayed This box is currently only used for messages defined in the TRADACOMS standard Selection of this box is mandatory for all TRADACOMS messages Groups Accesses the Outbound Group Select Dialog Box Interchanges Accesses the Outbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Last Used Control Number Specify a value that will be used to generate the next transaction set control number or message reference The number generated will always be one more than the number in this box Initially this box will be set to zero Expect Acknowledgement Instructs the system to expect a functional acknowledgement to be received from this trading partner as a result of your partner receiving the transaction set messa
155. ecutum DE er t S dr Avenel apes Ie pu ee e UR codd 11 32 Activating and Suspending Events lleleleseeeeee eese 11 36 Executing an Event Immediately 2 0 0 cee eee ae 11 38 Calendars xedsdasaixeee cede see bead ee a ede waa eee aie eee a CC RR 11 39 D OVERVIEW uni eA RUE RR E EIER bok SRG eae Read Sie as Baas 11 39 Creating and Editing Calendars nananana ccc esee 11 41 Deleting Calendars scesi i iana ups Ho Vea Ya ek a 11 43 Glossary Index Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide PREFACE Abovt this Guide Contents Introduction seeeeee RR RR viii What s in this Manual esse IIR 1X Getting Support 6 cece ene n ene xi Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 viii Introduction Welcome Welcome to Gentran Server for Windows the Sterling Commerce Electronic Data Interchange EDI software for the Windows operating system Gentran Server provides you with the easy to use tools you need to electronically exchange data with your trading partners including Data translation Process control Communications system We believe that you will find this software and the supporting materials easy to use and directly beneficial to your business Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide What s in this
156. ed from this partner Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Using Partners 3 18 Part Function Export File Name Specify the name of the file to be created or appended to as a result of performing an export operation This file name can contain a mix of alphanumeric characters and formatting characters which are replaced by the translator with the runtime value they represent Formatting characters supported Voy two digit year Y four digit year m abbreviated month name M month as a decimal number Jod abbreviated weekday name D day of the month as a decimal number 99H hour in 24 hour format N minutes 96S seconds K document key P process identifier U unique number derived using the current time export filename process identifier and the rand function Note The runtime file name is generated once per export Example The following is an example of a runtime file name using formatting characters d GENSRVNT exports dockey SKprocid SPuniqueidsuU dat Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Part Function Export to Mailbox Invokes the Export to Mailbox function which delivers the
157. ed to specify the structure and semantics of an XML document or message EANA International Article Numbering Association based in Brussels Belgium EDI Electronic Data Interchange EDI is the process by which companies can exchange business documents directly from application to application by computer without paper documents being produced EDI standard The rules for translating a business document into an EDI document EDIA The Electronic Data Interchange Association formerly known as the Transportation Data Coordinating Committee TDCC EDIFACT Electronic Data Interchange for Administration Commerce and Transport element The smallest piece of usable information defined by the standards Examples might include a quantity unit price or description An individual element can have somewhat different meanings depending on context Therefore elements are normally not considered to have useful meaning until they are combined into segments Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 6 There are three types of data elements as illustrated in the table below Data Element Definition Simple data element A single piece of information defined by the standards Composite data element A data element that is made up of multiple component elements Component data element A simple data element that belongs to a composite data element Compon
158. edgements A f Post to 20ut Documents Out Documents Generate and reconcile wv Na m ly Workspace In Drawer Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Ed Gentran Server Data Translation Process Getting Started 1 10 Translating inbound data process The system uses the following process to translate inbound data Stage 1 Description The Communicator receives interchanges from your trading partners via a network The Communicator passes the interchanges to the translator The translator uses a system interchange break translation object to unwrap the interchange envelopes and separate each group into temporary storage The translator uses a system group break translation object to unwrap the group envelopes and separate each transaction set into temporary storage The translator uses a system transaction break translation object to Unwrap the transaction envelopes Separate each document into a separate file on the system data store Write a record to the database with reference information about the document Does the translator locate a trading relationship for each document Ifyes a trading relationship is located the translator attempts to identify the export document turnaround or print translation object associated with that relationship If the translator does locate a trading relations
159. egister that translation object with the system before creating the outbound relationship See Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 for instructions Outbound You must define or select an outbound interchange and or outbound functional groups and group before the system allows you to complete the setup of an outbound interchanges relationship The outbound functional group defines the format of the functional group and the parameters that should be used to verify it The outbound interchange defines the format of the interchange and the parameters that should be used to verify it However for some transactions the functional group or interchange is optional and if your trading partner has chosen not to use it it is not necessary for you to select one Refer to the following standards descriptions to determine whether or not you are required to select an outbound functional group or interchange For some ANSI X12 documents the interchange is optional and the functional group is required However for most documents both an interchange and functional group are required Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound groups and interchanges contd Before you begin Outbound relationship dialog box Process of defining an outbound relationship Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Creating an Outbound Relations
160. el 1 7 locations deleting 3 119 editing 3 118 M Main Menu Bar 1 7 Main Toolbar 1 7 maximize 1 7 menu 1 8 Menu Bar 1 7 1 8 message 1 17 MHD envelope 3 70 minimize 1 7 moving 1 8 N network 1 8 non repudiation 1 8 O ODETTE 1 8 opening documents 4 35 Out Documents 1 8 Out Drawer 1 8 P partner 1 8 partner definition 3 4 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Partner Editor 1 4 1 8 partner profile 3 4 importing 3 56 partners attaching interchanges to 7 16 creating partner definition 3 56 editing 3 76 importing profiles 3 56 inbound relationship 3 58 advanced features 3 62 3 70 locations deleting 3 119 editing 3 118 tables deleting 3 107 deleting entries 3 106 using 3 1 posting 1 9 predefined 1 9 printing 1 9 data audit information 9 9 tracking information 9 10 printout 1 9 process control creating an event 11 23 deleting a calendar 11 43 deleting a session 11 15 deleting an event 11 31 editing a calendar 11 43 editing a session 11 12 using 11 1 processing data files 5 14 R receiving 1 9 reconciling documents and their acknowledgements 8 6 registering new template 2 7 responding 1 9 responsible agency 1 9 S segments 1 9 Send Queue 5 13 1 10 Send Queue stuck interchanges 7 18 sending 1 9 set 1 10 sorting 1 10 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide ST envelope 3 70 status 1 10 status bar 1 8 1 15 Stuck interchanges 7 18 STX envelope 3 75 support 1 xi synchronous
161. em in Gentran Server Reference See the Application Integration User s Guide and Forms Integration User S Guide more information about those subsystems There are two types of translation objects System translation objects System translation objects control the creation and separation of interchanges functional groups and transaction sets They are also used to generate and reconcile functional acknowledgements User translation objects User translation objects control screen entry importing exporting and creating printed reports All required system translation objects are automatically installed with the Gentran Server system Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Translation Objects EDI Translation Object Browser EDI Translation Object Browser Introduction The following lists the system components that comprise the EDI Translation Object feature Browser or Dialog box Function EDI Translation Allows you to view print delete or register translation Object objects Register Allows you to select translation objects to be registered with Translation the system Object EDI Translation The following illustrates the EDI Translation Object browser Object browser diagram EDI Translation Object 443 x GS Build Templa FGBuild GS Build Templa SYS Print FGBuild GS Build Templa SYS Delete FGBuild ACO Gm
162. ent data elements are also called sub elements envelope A way of separating information in transmissions for ease of processing Each envelope contains a header segment and a trailer segment which separate the envelope from other envelopes and provide information about the contents of the envelope There are three levels of envelopes Transaction Set Each transaction set business document is contained within a transaction set envelope Functional Group An envelope containing related business documents The standards define which transaction sets should be placed together into a functional group envelope Interchange Envelope All material being sent to one trading partner in one communication The term Interchange Envelope is the term used by ANSI EDIA uses the term Transmission Envelope to refer to this level of envelope Since we use the term transmission for other uses we refer to Interchange Envelope only Note A communications session could easily include a number of interchange envelopes For this reason the standards setting bodies are considering a fourth level of envelope to cover an entire communications session export This function enables you to write a document or documents to an external file for processing by another application There must be a system or a partner specific export translation object for the document Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Gu
163. ent item click Next or press ALT T After all loop items are entered click Store to save and exit the loop dialog box Ifthe document contains codes press SHIFT F1 from each code field to access a list of the codes Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating Documents 4 34 Using Documents Step Action If the document contains calculated fields select Recalculate from the File menu before saving the document System response The system updates the totals and checks the document for errors When you are finished entering data select Save from the File menu System response The system saves the information and automatically recalculates and check for errors If errors are found you are prompted to view the errors From the File menu select Exit System response You exit the Document Editor The system prompts you to save the document before closing Note You can now open and edit this document from the Workspace Browser Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Documents Opening and Editing Documents Opening and Editing Documents Introduction To edit a document using the Document Editor you need to set up the system to support screen entry for the partner transaction set combination you want to edit Note The appropr
164. ent location contains documents The Desk also allows you to access the Partner Editor subsystem the Help system the Process Control function clock icon and the Send Receive functions phone icon and allows you to quit Gentran Server Exit door icon Status bar The Status Bar displays status information about a selection command or process defines menu items as you highlight each item in the menu and indicates any current keyboard initiated modes for typing e g CAP for the Caps Lock key NUM for the Num Lock key Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Getting Started Gentran Server Data Translation Process Gentran Server Data Translation Process Translating The following illustrates the inbound translation process inbound data diagram 1 Communicator Y Receives interchanges from network and passes to translator Unwraps interchange envelopes Temporary are separates groups Storage Unwraps groups envelopes an Sato separates transaction sets Storage rx Unwraps transaction envelopes Temporary Pd separates documents Storage Translator Updates document database Locates trading relationship and associated translation objects In Documents Compliance checks and moves compliant documents In Documents document turnaround automatic export acknowl
165. er s Guide j Using Documents Routing Documents Moving Documents to the In Drawer Moving Documents to the In Drawer Introduction This function moves a selected document or group of documents to the In Drawer Browser Documents are automatically moved from the In Documents Browser or In Documents Browser to the In Drawer Browser by the system at the completion of a successful export or print However you might want to manually move a document to the In Drawer Browser so that you could create a turnaround response document Procedure To move a document or group of documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the In Documents Browser or In Documents Browser System response The system displays the appropriate summary dialog box for that browser Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the browser containing those documents Select the documents that you want to move to the In Drawer Browser and click Move System response The selected documents are moved to the In Drawer Browser Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Copying a Document to Reprocess and Resend Using Documents 4 52 Copying a Document to Reprocess and Resend Introduction The Copy function copies a document that was already sent su
166. er If you need to resend the document you must make a copy of the document and execute the Send process again using the copy Procedure To resend a document complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Out Drawer System response The system displays the Out Drawer Summary dialog box Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Drawer Browser Select the document or documents that need to be resent Note To select a group of documents click the first document press SHIFT and click the last document To select several documents that are not adjacent to each other in the Out Drawer list press CTRL and click the documents Click Copy to make a copy of the document and place the copy in the Workspace From the appropriate area of The Desk select Workspace System response The system displays the Workspace Browser Make any necessary changes to the documents Note You can modify a document only if there is a Screen Entry translation object for the partner relationship Select the documents and click Post System response The documents are posted to the Out Documents Browser Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Resending Documents 5 10 Using Communications Step Act
167. es are 2 300 seconds Notes This value is saved when you change focus on the dialog box click another box The Auto Refresh check box must be selected checked for the Seconds boxes to be available Refresh Actions seconds Specify the default interval 2 seconds for refreshing the Sessions list Valid values are 2 seconds 300 seconds Notes This value is saved when you change focus on the dialog box click another box The Auto Refresh check box must be selected checked for the Seconds boxes to be available Auto Refresh Indicate whether you want automatic refresh enabled The default 1s Enabled which means that you do not have to click Refresh Refresh Manually refreshes the Active Events display Note If the Active Events tab has not been refreshed after an event has expired is no longer active the system continues to display the event on the Active Events tab even though it is inactive until the Active Events tab is refreshed Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Creating New Events 11 23 Creating New Events Introduction Procedure You can specify that the event runs as timed or as polled If the event is running as timed you must specify a time a pre defined calendar and or days of the week to run or a date to run one time only When it is time for the even
168. es for the selected transaction set for which you have existing translation objects are displayed This box is currently only used for messages defined in the TRADACOMS standard Selection of this box is mandatory for all TRADACOMS messages Transaction is an Acknowledgement Specify if the transaction defined in this partner relationship is an acknowledgement Groups Accesses the Inbound Group Select Dialog Box Interchanges Accesses the Inbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Sequence Checking Specify if the system will use sequence checking and whether sequence checking will be incremental or chronological You can also indicate that the system must check for duplicate control numbers None Do not use sequence checking Duplicate Check for duplicate control numbers Incremental The control number must be one greater than the last number Chronological The control number must be greater than the last number Note If the system detects duplicate control numbers or detects incremental or chronological control numbers that are out of sequence those documents will be put in the In Documents Last Used Control Number Specify a value that is used to sequence check the next transaction set control number or message reference This value is replaced with the sequence number of the last transaction set or message received This box is initially set to zero Note This box is disabled
169. es the current session script Save As Saves the current session script under another name Delete Deletes the selected session Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Overview 11 5 Action Setup The following illustrates the Action Setup dialog box Action Setup x dialog box m Command Specification Command white to Audit Log if execution time exceeds minutes Cancel BIGWSE Condition Condition z Action Setup The following lists the parts of the Action Setup dialog box and their functions Function Select which command you want to add to the script Note Selecting a command allows you to access the parameters for that command which the system displays in the Command Setup section dialog box parts and functions Part Command Specification Write to Audit Log if execution time exceeds Specify that the system write an audit message if the command execution time exceeds the specified number of minutes next field Note If a command exceeds the allotted time the system writes a warning message to the Audit Log and the command continues to run until it completes minutes Specify the number of minutes after which the system writes a message to the Audit Log if the command has not finished processing Condition Gentran Server for Windows User s Guid
170. escription 1 The restored interchange is listed in the Restored Interchanges Browser Reference See Filtering the Display of Restored Interchanges on page 10 53 for instructions 2 When the resend command is executed the system first determines if it is a TRADACOMS interchange If the interchange is TRADACOMS the system increments the current version number in the FIL segment by one After this update the interchange is resent in the same manner as all other interchanges 3 Communication is established with the remote end The status of the message is updated based on the success or failure of the communications session Ifthe communication fails because there is no mailbox set up or because the Mailbox service is not started the interchange and documents are left in a Ready to send status Ifcommunication fails because there is no modem the interchange and documents are left in a Queued status Note No user action is required at this point Interchanges that failed to send are automatically sent as part of the next transmission session 4 After communication is successful the documents are moved to the Out Drawer Browser and the interchange status is set to Sent Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Archive and Restore Resending Restored Interchanges D 10 59 Procedure To resend restored outbound interchanges complete the following steps
171. ess a list of the codes If the document contains calculated fields select Recalculate from the File menu before saving the document System response The system updates the totals and checks the document for errors When you are finished entering data select Save from the File menu System response The system saves the information and automatically recalculates and checks for errors If errors are found you are prompted to view the errors From the File menu select Exit System response The system prompts you to save the document before closing Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Documents Using Documents Managing Documents Viewing Documents View function Using the View function Viewing a Document from the Document Browsers The View function enables you to view various types of information depending on the format selected in the View Choice Dialog Box The view types include Raw input data External data EDI formatted data Translator report Data audit Tracking information Notes The formatted view option is only active if a Screen Entry translation object is available in the Partner Relationship record The external data option is only active if the data file used in translation is available When viewing raw input or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selec
172. esults Dialog Box Cancel Exits the Mailbox Search dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 External Data Archive Definition Dialog Box Using Archive and Restore 10 28 External Data Archive Definition Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the External Data Archive Definition dialog box External Data Archive Definition x Name ftest IV Delete Data After Archive r Selection Crtena Add Delete Action Taken Days Old ArchiveEw Data Fies 0 Yes All Parts and The following lists the parts of the External Data Archive Definition dialog box functions and their functions Part Function Name Specify the name of the archive definition file Note This name must be unique Delete Data After Tell the system to remove the message data after Archive archiving it This is selected by default Add Accesses the External Data Selection Criteria Dialog Box and enables you to define new archive criteria Edit Accesses the External Data Selection Criteria Dialog Box for the selected mailbox criteria and enables you to modify the archive criteria Continued on next page f Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore External Data Archive Definition Dialog Box D 10 29 Part
173. ettste2 int i Petzone3 pu n auc File name Pettest int 1 Files of type ai Files Cancel Parts and The following lists the parts of the Process File dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Look in Select the folder where the system should look for the file Displays the current File name Specify the name of the export file Files of type Select the type of file Open Executes the selected function exits the dialog box Cancel Exits the dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Sending Document 5 6 Sending Document Using Communications Procedure To senda selected document or set of documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Out Documents System response The system displays the Out Documents Summary dialog box Note If the documents to be sent are not in the Out Documents Browser you must post the documents from the Workspace Browser to the Out Documents Browser Reference See Posting Documents on page 4 53 for more information Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Documents Browser Select the document or documents that need to be sent Note To select a group of documents click the first document press SHIFT and click the last document To selec
174. eturns to their previous location any documents that are displayed on this dialog box but for which processing has terminated Note This function is typically used for exception cases when the processing of a document terminated improperly Refresh Refreshes the browser display Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 View Choice Dialog Box Using Documents 4 20 Related Dialog Boxes View Choice Dialog Box Introduction The View Choice dialog box enables you to specify how you want to view the selected document Diagram The following illustrates the View Choice dialog box View Choice x Gentran Data C Extemal Data C Formatted Document Translator Report C Data Audit C Tracking Information Cancel Parts and The following lists the parts of the View Choice dialog box and their functions functions You can select only one of these options Part Function Gentran Data Displays the raw EDI data External Data Displays the data file used in translation Note This option is not available if the external data file used in translation does not exist Formatted Displays the data in the Document Editor using a screen Document entry translation object Note This option is not available if no screen entry translation object exists for the document Continued on next
175. export or automatic turnaround in the trading relationship the translator uses the specified export or document turnaround translation object to either export or generate the appropriate response document Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 em Gentran Server Data Translation Process 1 12 Getting Started Translating The following illustrates the outbound translation process outbound data diagram Import m N Application N Document Editor p System Locates system impdr onfiguration A translation object System Impo Determines trading m Translator relationship jec f Partner q Database Use trading i N relationship to determine Import Translation Object Import Translation Object T and formats to Imports through process control Workspace Compliance checks documents EDI Posts compliant documents to Out Documents Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 i gt Out Documents amp Sends documents to partners Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Getting Started Gentran Server Data Translation Process E 1 13 Translating The system uses the following process to translate outbound data outbound data process Stage 1 Description Use one of the following processes to initiate outbound translation
176. file 2 The Translator executes the import translation object It obtains the ExtDataType and ExtDataKEY from the IPC file and writes the ExtDataXref tb entries that link the documents to the external data reference created by EDIMGR or UNATTEND References See the following for more information Importing Documents on page 4 57 Using Process Control on page 11 1 Using Database Tables appendix in the Administration Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Tracking Tracking Outbound Information Mailbox import When an external data file is imported using a Collection Mailbox all the process associated message identifiers are tracked by the system according to the following process Stage Description 1 When outbound data flows through the system the Collection Mailbox creates a data file and an associated message ID in its Outbox with ContentType set to Application Import The Collection Mailbox sends it to your Gentran Application Inbox creating a new target message ID Note For a Mailbox Import you must specify the UNC path and file name on the System Configuration Imports tab This specification must exactly match the path you set for the TRANSIN directory on the System Configuration Directories tab References See the following for more information How to Create a File System Mailbox in the Communication
177. following illustrates the Select Export Method dialog box Select Export Method C Select File by Document Export to Single File Cancel C Esport to Default Files Parts and The following lists the parts of the Select Export Method dialog box and their functions functions You can select only one of these options Part Function Export to Single File Converts all selected documents to data and accesses the Choose File to Export Document Dialog Box to write them to a single file Export to Default Files Writes selected documents to the files set up in the partner inbound relationship Reference See Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box on page 3 15 for more information about designating the export file Select File by Document Accesses the Choose File to Export Document Dialog Box which enables you to rename selected documents to be exported OK Executes the selected function exits the dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Select Export Method Dialog Box 4 24 Using Documents Part Function Cancel Exits the dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Choose File to Export Document Dialog Box Choose File to Export Docu
178. for documents with the specified value in Application Field 5 Application Field 6 Searches for documents with the specified value in Application Field 6 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Filter Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Parts and functions Filter Dialog Box The Filter function can be used when the Out Drawer is active to filter the display of documents by status If you want to filter the display of documents in the Out Drawer by the document status you can choose not to display documents with a certain status by selecting the check box next to each status that you do not want displayed Note When you clear a check box the display of that status is turned off The default is to display documents regardless of status The following illustrates the Filter dialog box Filter OutDrawer Contents Filter IV Sent 4 v Received by Network IV Warning from Network M Error from Network IV Picked Up by Trading Partner IV Acknowledged with No Errors IV Waiting for Acknowledgement M Acknowledgements Overdue IV Acknowledgements with Errors v Partially Acknowledged IV Acknowledged but Rejected IV Send Failed The following lists the filter criteria and their descriptions Part Function Sent Filters for documents that were successfully transmitted Received by Filters for document
179. for more information Complete the appropriate boxes in the enveloping section of the dialog box Note You should only complete those boxes that are necessary for the standard the copied partner profile uses The standards are listed to the right of each box Ifthe partner profile you copied uses a standard you must complete all the necessary enveloping boxes for that standard If you do not complete the necessary boxes for the standard the system takes the necessary information from the copied partner profile envelope Example If the copied partner profile uses the UCS standard you must complete the Interchange Communication ID box among others After you enter all the partner information click Save System response The system displays the Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Copying Partner Profiles Using Partners 3 90 Step Action 6 On the Partner Copy dialog box type a unique profile identifier in the Profile ID box T In the Name box type the partner name 8 In the EDI Code box type the EDI identifier for this partner Note The system uses this identifier during inbound processing to select the correct partner 9 If necessary in the Application Code box type an application code to identify this partner Note The system uses this identifier d
180. ft Data Access MDAC version and Internet Explorer version Also please describe any recent changes in your hardware software or the configuration of your system Which machines contain folders in the system data store Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 xii Information Description Error Messages Record the exact wording of any error messages you receive and the point in the software where the error occurred as well as any log files Attempted Solutions Record any steps that you took attempting to resolve the problem and note all the outcomes Provide an estimate on how many times the problem occurred and whether it can be reproduced Accessing the The Sterling Commerce Customer Support Web Site contains valuable Sterling information about getting support for Gentran Server for Windows including the Commerce following Support Web Scope of support services Site Customer support policies Call prioritizing Customer support phone directory Creating new Support on Demand cases Checking the status of Support on Demand cases Adding information to Support on Demand cases The Customer Support Web site is constantly updated and all Sterling Commerce customers have access to it This web site also contains the most recent product updates and is a valuable source of product information Referenc
181. fy an interval of time after which the event is to be executed Example If you specify 15 minutes the event is executed every 15 minutes Calendar Select one of the calendars you defined on the Calendars tab that you want the system to check against when scheduling this session Notes Acalendar allows you to specify days in each month that you do not want the selected session to be run Ifyou use the Date box you cannot use the Calendar box Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Indicate which days of the week the event is to be executed Date Specify a date on which the event is to be executed Notes You can enter this date in any format but the sequence of the date you enter must correspond to the international Windows date formats for example in the United State dates must be entered in month day year format Ifyou select a calendar from the Calendar box or days of the week you cannot use the Date box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Overview 11 21 Part Function Polled tab File name Specify the name of the file for which the system checks Note You can use a wildcard to specify the name of the file Browse Accesses the Choose Network Server dialog box so you can browse for the file for which you want the system to check Resul
182. g box click Save to save the inbound relationship Click Exit to return to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Outbound Relationship Using Partners 3 66 Creating an Outbound Relationship Introduction To correctly send information to a trading partner you need to define an outbound relationship Outbound relationships define the parameters needed to send a data file to a trading partner Each outbound relationship defines the format of a single business document and how that business document is formatted and sent to the specified trading partner Necessary You must set up several parameters that are used to create an outbound parameters relationship These parameters tell the system the following information How to create the required message The criteria that the system uses to validate the information entered How to create the functional group and interchange envelopes in preparation for sending Translation Each outbound relationship must have one or more associated outbound objects translation objects These translation objects determine how the sent data is formatted You need to specify which translation objects are used to define the rules for screen entry or file import At a minimum one translation object must be available Note If this relationship requires a new translation object you must r
183. g of the interchange matches the default code page of the operating system where Gentran Server is running Diagram The following illustrates the Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box with the Advanced options displayed Outbound Interchange Entry PETZONE Ix Save Description Outbnd 3030 FA Int Standard XX12 E Version 003030 Envelope Interchange SA s v Use the default Mailbox and E mail Address evs Meiboy Mailbox GENTRAN Application v E mail Address Edit Meibor Content Type pplication EDI Set Max Number of Documents per Interchange Men honiber of Documents ger lAterchenge o Last Used Control Number Espect Acknowledgement 000000000 Hous Ti vETdUe p Interchange Transl Obi i54 Build Template ANSI Acknowledge Transl Obj Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Parts and functions Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box The following lists the parts of the Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box and their functions Part Function Description Displays the name of the interchange description Standard Displays the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship definition Version Displays the version of the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship Interchange ID Displays the type of interchange you specified The standard defines which i
184. ge defined in this relationship The default value for this box is not checked do not expect an acknowledgement Hours Overdue Defines how many hours must elapse before an expected functional acknowledgement is considered overdue This box is only valid if the Expect Acknowledgement box is checked The default value for this box is 48 indicating that the acknowledgement will be considered overdue in two days If you enter a value of zero in this box the acknowledgement will be immediately considered overdue Note This box is disabled if Expect Acknowledgement is not checked Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Relationship Dialog Box 3 38 Using Partners Part Function Duplicate Documents Instructs the system to check for duplicate document names Notes Ifyou manually import documents into the Workspace this function checks for duplicate documents Duplicate documents remain in the Workspace until they are deleted If you try to move or post a duplicate document a warning message is displayed If you use the Process Control import feature to import documents the duplicate document is located in Out Documents If duplicate document checking is activated for a relationship the translation object used in this relationship must update the document name via a standard or extended rule
185. h System response The system displays the archive file along with the date and time on which the archive data file was created Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Archive and Restore Viewing Archived Data D 10 39 Viewing Archived Data Procedure To view archived information complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Archive System response The system displays the Archive Manager 2 Expand the archive tree and open the appropriate Archives folder 3 In the Archive folder locate the archive data file for which you want to view the contents summary or detailed or search for a specific piece of data and click the to the left of that file System response The system displays the archived files When you select an archive file the system displays summary information for each item Reference See Archive Manager on page 10 5 for details about the information available at each level 4 Select Preferences from the Archive menu choose how you want your archive data sorted in the Archive tree view and click OK 5 To view additional information select the appropriate level of the tree and use the following table to determine your next action Note N A indicates that the information that the system displays when you selected the specified item IF you want to view
186. h the documents from the Interchanges browser A suitable trading relationship or translation object could not be associated with the document Detailed information concerning what information was used to locate the relationship and or the translation object is listed in the audit log To correct this problem a valid relationship must be established using the Partner Editor and a valid export print or turn around translation object must be defined for that relationship A major error occurred while processing the interchange functional group or transaction level enveloping structures This error may include header and trailer control numbers that do not match an invalid trailer control count or a control number sequence checking error If any of these errors occur they are listed on the translator report for the interchange containing the documents Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide C E Out Documents NotOK This code indicates that the document does not comply with the EDI standard definition The errors that are causing the compliance failure can be determined by viewing the translator report for the document In Documents OK All documents in the In Documents have a status of OK These documents are fully compliant and are eligible for further processing In Drawer OK This code indicates that the documents are fully compliant
187. hange the way the system behaves for this partner relationship When the system reconciles an acknowledgement it maps the acknowledgement to an internal file and then processes it If you need the system to process acknowledgements differently you should select an additional translation object from the Acknowledge list If the transaction set is an acknowledgement and you choose an Acknowledge additional translation object the system will use the additional translation object in place of the export translation object for acknowledgement reconciliation Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Inbound Translation Object dialog box Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Inbound Group Select Dialog Box Inbound Group Select Dialog Box Introduction The Inbound Group Select dialog box is used to select an existing functional group definition to be associated with this relationship It can also be used to initiate the definition of a new functional group or to modify or delete an existing definition The groups available to you are determined by the version you selected on the Inbound Relationship dialog Note Functional groups are required for ANSI X12 TDCC and UCS standards optional for EDIFACT and ODETTE and not specified for TRADA
188. hanges groups and documents that were restored from an archive file This browser contains status information about the interchanges such as whether a functional acknowledgement was received and the status of that acknowledgement Information The information about the Restored Interchanges browser is organized in a organization hierarchical manner The following table describes the hierarchical organization of the information on the Restored Interchanges browser Information displayed in middle pane Level How to access all information may not appear Interchange Open Restored direction of the interchange Interchanges browser date and time the interchange was created partner name control number interchange process status network status interchange acknowledgement status message status Note If any of these components are missing or not appropriate for a particular interchange they are not displayed Group Double click an group control number interchange group type group acknowledgement status Note If any of these components are missing or not appropriate for a particular group they are not displayed Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Archive and Restore Restored Interchanges Browser D 10 47 Information displayed in middle pane Level How to access all i
189. hanges before the system allows you to complete the setup of an inbound relationship The inbound functional group defines the format of the functional group and the parameters that should be used to verify it The inbound interchange defines the format of the interchange and the parameters that should be used to verify it However for some transactions the functional group or interchange is optional and if your trading partner has chosen not to use it then it is not necessary for you to select one Refer to the following standards to determine whether or not you are required to select an inbound functional group or interchange Forsome ANSI X12 documents the interchange is optional and the functional group is required However for most documents both an interchange and functional group are required For TDCC the interchange is optional and the functional group is required Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound groups and interchanges contd Before you begin Inbound relationship dialog box Process of defining an inbound relationship Creating an Inbound Relationship For UCS the interchange is required and the functional group is also required For EDIFACT the interchange is required and the functional group is optional For ODETTE the interchange is required and the functional group is option
190. has access to The reciprocal relationship between the keys allows anyone to encrypt data with your public key and then you can decrypt it with your private key No one else has access to the data once it is encrypted including the person who encrypted it Similarly you can encrypt data with your private key and then anyone can decrypt that data with your public key Although this makes the data freely available but it ensures that only you could have created it Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j GL 5 document One transaction set containing data and treated as a single entity The amount of data does not affect whether something is a document or not only the fact that it is treated as a single entity For example regardless of whether a purchase order contains one item or ten thousand items if it is one purchase order it is one document If a trading partner sends you a communication containing 10 purchase orders you have received 10 documents If the communication contains 15 invoices you have received 15 documents double click Indicates that you should position your cursor on top of the designated item and quickly press and release your primary mouse button twice The primary mouse button is the button you access with your index finger regardless of whether you are using right handed or left handed mouse operation DTD A DTD document type definition is a type of schema us
191. he Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box 4 From the Import list select ACKBUILD CONTRL DLL Note The default translation object selected for the Outbound Control Build relationship is the ACKBUILD_CONTRL 5 Click Save to save your selections and return to the Outbound Relationship dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Checking for Overdue Acknowledgements Using Acknowledgements 8 12 Checking for Overdue Acknowledgements Introduction You can manually check for overdue acknowledgements by using the Overdue Check feature Note You can specify the frequency at which the system will check for overdue acknowledgements in whole minutes in the System Configuration program This allows you to disable or reduce the frequency of overdue acknowledgement checking Reference See How to Change the Frequency of Overdue Acknowledgement Checking in the Administration Guide for more information Procedure To check for overdue acknowledgements complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Commands menu select Overdue Check System response The system checks if any interchange group or document that requires an acknowledgement is overdue the system has not received an acknowledgement for it and the specified time to do so has expired For any overdue interchange group or document the system sets the status to Overdue on the Inte
192. he Restored Interchanges browser Restored Interchanges Summary 2 OFX E a far Partners Date Time Checking is Off Root Control Number Type Doc Name Referenc HDRPETTEST X0030 4 E 000000001 PETZONE j d 0001 810 5555555555 2020022 BEG331111111x0000C C305 10 2002 09 33 AM 5555555555559505 m 1205 12 2002 12 46 PM PET 3 4 PETZONE dx 0004 PETZONE Parts and The following lists the parts of the Restored Interchanges browser and their functions functions Part Function Status bar Reflects the filer specifications from the Interchange Filter Dialog Box on page 7 8 Note The Electronic Commerce Manager status bar is updated when you select a single item from the middle pane left pane Displays a list of all the restored interchanges groups and Interchanges tree documents Also displays the time created and partner name Note To refresh the display of the Restored Interchanges browser press F5 Reference See the following for more information Archive information available to view on page 10 5 Document level status icons on page 10 50 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Restored Interchanges Browser 10 49 Part Function middle pane detailed list Displays detailed information about the document group
193. he archive The following table describes the archive process process Stage 1 Description Define the archiving parameters ARD file The archive parameters available depend on the type of data you are archiving THEN the available archive parameters IF you archive are Gentran EDI partner profile ID whether the interchange is inbound or outbound age processed status network status acknowledgement status Mailbox messages mailbox a particular mailbox or all mailboxes location Inbox Outbox or both age status content type external data action taken age Execute the archive process which creates the archive files ARV in the Archive folder Note This definition can be run interactively or on a scheduled basis via Process Control Reference See Using Process Control chapter 11 in this guide for more information about scheduling the archive process In the archive process the system copies or removes data both from the database tables and the system data store Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Archive and Restore Archive Manager Archive Manager Introduction Archive information available to view The Archive Manager is the facility through which you archive and restore data The Archive Manager enables you to view the following
194. he browser containing those documents Click Delete System response The system displays a confirmation dialog box Click Yes System response The document is deleted Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Documents Printing Documents Printing Documents Introduction Ifno documents are selected the Print function prints a summary list of all documents in the browser For selected documents the Print function prints one of the following Raw EDI data Formatted version of the documents using the print translation object established partner relationship Summary list of those documents Procedure To print a document or group of documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the current location of the document by selecting the location System response If you select one of the document browsers the system displays the appropriate summary dialog box for that browser Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the browser containing those documents Do you want to print a summary list of all documents Ifyes click Print to access the Print dialog box Continue with step 6 Ifno continue with step 4 Do you want to print selected documents either formatted or n
195. he browser to only those of the document type and partner that you want Browser columns The following lists the columns displayed in all browsers Part Function Partner Identifies the trading partner Type Identifies the specific type of EDI document Example 810 identifies an invoice Name Displays the user assigned name of the document Status The allowable status depends on the browser Reference See the Glossary for more information about status values Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Documents Accessing the Document Browsers Part Function RefData Displays the reference data assigned by the translation object designer to identify this document Segment element positional value such as a PO Number for a purchase order Blank no reference data is assigned Note In the browsers you can click a column heading to sort the display by that values in that column Procedure To access any of the document browsers complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the browser System Response The system displays the appropriate summary dialog box for that browser 2 Select the type of document for the appropriate partner Notes 3 Click View System response The system displays the browser containing those
196. he selected document Delete Deletes the selected document Export Not a valid function from this browser Copy Copies the selected documents to the Workspace Note This function enables you to reprocess and resend documents that were already sent by the system Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Out Drawer Browser 4 18 Using Documents Part Function Ack Changes the status of the selected documents to Acknowledged Refresh Refreshes the browser display Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Processing Browser Processing Browser Introduction Diagram Parts and functions The Processing browser contains a list of documents that the system is currently processing Note The Processing browser displays the current status of the processing document If the document is processing the status code is set to 1 If the document or acknowledgement is deferred the status code is set to 2 The following illustrates the Processing browser Processing 0 Bik RefDat gt Refresh Close D selected selecte Help 0 Documents The following lists the parts of the Processing browser and their functions Part Function Reset R
197. hen viewing raw input or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Viewing Currently Processing Documents Viewing Currently Processing Documents Processing browser Reset function Procedure The Processing Browser displays any document that is currently being processed in the Gentran Server system This browser enables you to ascertain which documents are currently being processed by you or other users in the Gentran Server system Note Any document that is currently being processed in the Gentran Server system is displayed in the appropriate browser as unavailable and you are not permitted to access that document until processing is complete and the document has been released to the system The Processing Browser enables you to use the Reset function to return to their previous location any documents that are displayed in the browser but for which processing has terminated Typically you use this function for exception cases when the processing of a document terminated improperly To view the documents that are currently being processed complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the View menu select Processing System Response The system displays the Processing Browser 2 You can view the currently processing documents or pe
198. her use 24 hour HH MM format or 12 hour HH MM format with the designator a am or p pm If you want to specify a stop time for the event type that time in the Until box on the Timed tab Note You can either use 24 hour HH MM format or 12 hour HH MM or H MM format with the designator a am or p pm Do you want to specify an interval of time after which the event is run Ifyes in the Minutes box on the Timed tab type the number of minutes after which you want the event to be executed and continue with Step 4 Example If you specify 15 minutes the event is executed every 15 minutes Ifno continue with Step 4 Do you want to use a predefined calendar Ifyes select that calendar from the Calendar list and continue with Step 5 Ifno continue with Step 5 Note A calendar enables you to specify days in each month that you do not want the selected session to be run If you select a calendar you can also select specific days of the week on which you want this session to run on However if you select a calendar you cannot specify a day in the Date box Reference If you need to define a calendar please see Creating and Editing Calendars on page 11 41 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Editing Events 11 29 Step Action Do you
199. hich allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print the selected document Delete Deletes the selected document Note If a document is waiting for acknowledgement processing acknowledgement generation or reconciliation you may not delete it until this processing is complete Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents In Documents Browser 4 9 Part Function Export Accesses the Select Export Method Dialog Box which allows you to export the selected document Move Moves the selected document to the In Drawer Refresh Refreshes the display of the browser Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 In Drawer Browser Using Documents 4 10 In Drawer Browser Introduction The In Drawer browser contains a list of documents that the system received and processed Diagram The following illustrates the In Drawer browser In Drawer Rons Eggs Receipt Acknowledge 1 L C EX View ieceipt Acknow B b2F2 z pecon O Print Delete Esport Respond a 1 Documents TE 1 selected Lo Pme Dee Em Respond etes eo Parts and The following lists the parts of the In Drawer browser and their f
200. hip For TDCC the interchange is optional and the functional group is required For UCS the interchange is required and the functional group is also required For EDIFACT the interchange is required and the functional group is optional ForODETTE the interchange 1s required and the functional group is optional For TRADACOMS the Interchange is required and there is no functional group Note If you do not want to use an optional functional group or interchange you must still select none from the appropriate dialog box to alert the system that you are not using a group Before setting up an outbound relationship you must know the following information to plan the implementation of this partner The EDI standard this trading partner expects such as ANSI X12 The standard version that this partner expects such as 003020 for ANSI or 090001 for EDIFACT The code for the transaction set you use such as INVOIC for an EDIFACT invoice The type of functional group and interchange envelope the transaction set is wrapped in when it is sent to this partner After you complete your implementation planning for this partner you can set up the outbound relationship by using the Outbound Relationship dialog box The Outbound Relationship dialog box controls other subordinate dialog boxes where you define everything that is necessary to establish the relationship The following describes the proce
201. hip and translation object it uses that translation object to compliance check the document fno the translator does not locate the trading relationship or translation object the document is marked as not compliant and is moved in the In Documents Is the document is compliant with the EDI standard Ifyes the translator changes the document status to compliant and moves the document in the In Documents Ifno the document remains in the In Documents The translator writes a detailed error report to help you to determine the problem that was encountered Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Getting Started Gentran Server Data Translation Process LI 1 11 Stage Description 8 In the trading relationship if you specify that the system needs to generate a functional acknowledgement for a document the translator uses the system acknowledgement translation object to generate the acknowledgement Compliant acknowledgements are moved to the Out Documents to be sent Non compliant acknowledgements are moved to the Out Documents If an error occurred with the acknowledgement translation object the acknowledgement is also moved to the Out Documents The translator also reconciles acknowledgements if you receive an acknowledgement type transaction such as 997 or CONTRL 9 If you specified either automatic
202. his chapter This chapter explains how to use Gentran Server acknowledgements including the following topics Defining acknowledgement criteria inbound Defining acknowledgement criteria outbound Manually acknowledging a document group or interchange Checking for overdue acknowledgements Acknowledgement Acknowledgements are sent to a trading partner to inform them that you received a transmission they sent and to inform them of any errors You must define the level of acknowledgements that you expect from your trading partners and you are sending to your trading partners upon receipt of a transmission Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Acknowledgements Defining Inbound Acknowledgement Criteria Defining Inbound Acknowledgement Criteria Introduction The criteria that the system uses to acknowledge inbound documents functional groups and interchanges is defined at the partner level on the Partner Editor Inbound Relationship dialog boxes The translation objects used by the system to generate functional acknowledgements are included as system translation objects and are registered automatically when you install Gentran Server Note If you generate functional acknowledgements as a result of receiving documents for an inbound relationship you must set up the corresponding outbound relationship to generate the acknowledgements your partner requests Reference See
203. ia the Restored Interchanges browser When data is restored the archive data file ARV file is not altered You can restore data from the same archive file again if you wish To restore data to your system the following must be true The item must have been deleted after it was archived For message data the original mailbox must still exist on your system Note If the original mailbox does not exist Archive Manager attempts to recreate it This facsimile mailbox does not contain all the properties of the original one Reference See Creating an Archive Definition on page 10 36 for more information about the post archive delete function As the number of archive data files created by the Archive function increases and corresponding disk space is used you may determine that you want to move archive data files to tape Note Copying archive files to tape is not part of the Gentran Server functionality If you move an archive file to tape the Archive Search facility is no longer aware of the existence of the file Files that are moved to tape cannot be viewed while on tape However if you reload an archive file from tape to the Archives folder you can once again view the data via the Archive Manager Recommendation Use some type of tape management system to track the archive files saved to tape Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore O
204. iate Screen Entry translation object must be loaded and a corresponding outbound relationship must be set up for the partner References For additional information see the following Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 Gentran Server Online Help Document Editor Procedure To open and edit a document complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Workspace System Response The system displays the Workspace Browser 2 Select the desired document from the Workspace Note Only documents in the Workspace can be edited Ifthe document has already been moved to the Out Documents and has not been sent you can move it back to the Workspace using the UnPost function see UnPosting Documents on page 4 54 Ifa document has been sent it cannot be modified However you can move a copy of the document from the Out Drawer to the Workspace modify the copy and send it see Copying a Document to Reprocess and Resend on page 4 52 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Opening and Editing Documents 4 36 Using Documents Step Action Click Open System response The system displays the document in the Document Editor facility as shown below Document Editor ANSI X12 Invoice 810
205. ich the system filters the display of external data files Note The Date To box is not active if either the No Date Time Checking check box is selected or the Always Current check box is selected Always Current Indicate that the end date for the date range 1s always the current system date and time Note The Always Current check box is only active if the No Date Time Checking check box is not selected No Date Time Indicate if the system filters the display of external data Checking files by date and time if selected Action Contains a list of all the actions the system can perform using external data files This list allows you to filter the display of external data files by the actions you specify Note The default display is all actions but you can clear them Unselect All Clears all the actions Actions Note This allows you to filter the display of external data files by the actions you specify Warning At least one action must be selected OK Exits the dialog box saves the selections Cancel Exits the dialog box without saving selections Help Opens the online help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 EN Viewing External Data Files Viewing External Data Files Procedure Using External Data To view external data files complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the View menu select External
206. ick Browse to select the file from the appropriate drive and directory Note You can use a wildcard to specify the name Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Editing Events 11 30 Using Process Control Step Action From the Result list select True or False Note Ifyou select True you are indicating that the event should only be executed when the specified file is present Ifyou select False you are indicating that the event should be executed only when the specified file does rot exist Saving the event Click OK System response The event is saved and you exit the Event Setup dialog box Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Deleting Events Deleting Events 11 31 Introduction You are not able to delete an event unless the event is suspended Reference See Procedure suspending an event on page 11 37 for more information Procedure To delete an event complete the following steps Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Click the Events tab to display the event options System response
207. ide fail over find functional group header import In Documents In Drawer interchange Interchanges browser label Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide GL 7 A failover system is a backup operation that automatically switches to a standby database server or network if the primary system fails or is temporarily shut down for servicing Fail over is an important fault tolerance function of mission critical systems that rely on constant accessibility Fail over automatically and to the user transparently redirects requests from the failed or down system to the backup system that mimics the operations of the primary system This function enables you to find specified text in the active data view window A group of transaction sets that the standards setting body such as ANSI has defined as fitting together with other related transaction sets For example a Functional Group may be defined as containing all purchasing transaction sets Control information prepended to data content normally used to describe the data or the relationship of the data with the applications This command enables you to import data from an external application file Depending on the content of the file the system may prompt you for partner transaction or translation object information This browser contains a list of documents that the system received but that have not yet been processed by the user Once the documents are pro
208. iew of an interchange Raw data view of a document A predefined value Programs use these built in values unless you specifically override them This is a graphic representation of Gentran Server that provides an easy way to access some of the most commonly used browsers functions and subsystems of Gentran Server You can click the appropriate part of The Desk any time you need to access a browser function or subsystem represented there The following are the browsers you can access In Documents In Documents Workspace Out Documents Out Documents Interchanges In Drawer Out Drawer Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 4 Each browser icon displays a graphic representation of paper if the document location contains documents The Desk also allows you to access the Partner Editor subsystem the Help system the Process Control function clock icon and the Send Receive functions phone icon and allows you to quit Gentran Server EXIT door icon You can turn the display of The Desk off by clicking The Desk on the View menu This toggles the display of The Desk on and off A checkmark next to that item means it is on dialog box A dialog box or dialog contains additional information or options that you need to act on If you specify any options you can select a button to execute the comman
209. ile used in translation if this option is selected from the View Interchanges menu Notes This option is only available if a single item is selected from the detailed list This option is not available if the external data file used in translation does not exist When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu middle right pane Gentran Data Displays the data in EDI format if this option is selected from the View Interchanges menu Notes This option is only available if a single item is selected from the detailed list When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu lower right pane Translator Report Displays a report of the actions the translator took on this document and lists any EDI or translation object based compliance errors if this option is selected from the View Interchanges menu Note This option is only available if a single item is selected from the detailed list Reference See Error Messages in the Administration Guide for more information Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Interchanges Interchanges Browser Document level The following lists the status icons that the system may use at the document level status icon
210. indows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide PickedUp NetWarn NetErr Send Queue Queued GL 15 This code indicates that the document was successfully delivered to a trading partner through a VAN To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 70 report in data format This code indicates that the document was delivered to a VAN which detected non critical errors in the data The data is available to be picked up by the designated trading partner To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 20 report in data format This code indicates that the document was delivered to a VAN which detected critical errors in the data The data is not available to be picked up by the designated trading partner To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 20 report in data format This code indicates that the document was successfully interchanged in preparation for sending but the interchange was not transferred correctly to your partner The interchange will be automatically sent in the next communication session with this partner Ready to Send Send Failed Workspace OK NotOK Indicates that a document is ready to send but a mailbox message has not yet been created for the data Indicates that the send attemp
211. ing the inbound relationship on page 3 65 System response This action selects the highlighted interchange and returns you to the Inbound Relationship dialog box Ifno continue with the next step to create the interchange Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Creating an Inbound Relationship Step Action On the Inbound Interchange Select dialog box click New System response The system displays the Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box In the Description box type the interchange description In the Interchange ID box type the identification of the interchange you are specifying Note The EDI standards define which interchange ID should be used for each type of document If you have more complex requirements for processing the interchange click Advanced to display the full list of interchange setup options System response The system displays the Advanced fields on the Inbound Interchange Entry dialog box After you set up the required parameters in this dialog box click Save to store the information and return to the Inbound Interchange Select dialog box Highlight the new interchange Click Select System response Selects the interchange and returns to the Inbound Relationship dialog box Finalizing the inbound relationship On the Inbound Relationship dialo
212. inistration Guide Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 ES Tracking Outbound Information Using Tracking Tracking Outbound Information Introduction For outbound processing the system can import external data through the Import command within Gentran Server or through a Mailbox message when the ContentType is configured to Application Import After the file is imported into the system you can send the file or configure Process Control to send the file automatically After a send command a new mailbox message is created and any subsequent send transmissions create a new mailbox message that is related to the same external data file that was initially imported Import process Data is imported using the following process Stage Description 1 The external data is imported directly into Gentran Server This data is either coming from an unattended process control GDW_Import or a manual import 2 Depending on how the data is imported either UNATTEND or EDIMGR copies the external data file to the External Data folder in the system data store 3 UNATTEND or EDIMGR updates the ExtData tb with an entry that indicates the filename the date and time from the timestamp on the file the date and time of the action and the ExtDataKEY 4 UNATTEND or EDIMGR writes the ExtDataType and ExtDataKEY parameters to the IPC file they are called Type and Key respectively in this
213. internal file and then processes it If you need the system to process acknowledgements differently you should select an additional translation object from the Acknowledge list Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Group Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Inbound Group Entry dialog box Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Inbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Inbound Interchange Select Dialog Box Introduction The Inbound Interchanges Select dialog box is used to select an existing interchange definition to be associated with this relationship You can also use it to initiate the definition of a new interchange or to modify or delete an existing definition The interchanges available to you are determined by the version you selected on the Inbound Relationships dialog Interchanges are required for EDIFACT ODETTE TRADACOMS and UCS and optional for ANSI X12 and TDCC Diagram The following illustrates the Inbound Interchange Select dialog box Inbound Interchange Select PETZONE x Interchanges Select Exit Inbound x3040 PO Int New Delete Help Parts
214. ion From the appropriate area of The Desk select Out Documents System response The system displays the Out Documents Summary dialog box Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Documents Browser 10 11 Select the documents and click Send System response The system displays the Gentran Server for Windows dialog box Click Yes to start the transmission session Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Communications Receiving Documents Receiving Documents Introduction Procedure method 1 Procedure method 2 Any time a Send session is executed the system automatically checks your Mailbox for any information waiting to be received by your system If any data is in the Mailbox it is received without any action from you If you need to receive information without first sending anything you must initiate a receive only session using one of two methods From the Commands menu select the Receive command Access the In Documents browser and click Receive To start a receive only session complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Commands menu select Receive System response The system displays the Communications Session Dialog Box 2 Click OK to start a communication session to send data Note The system initia
215. ion of the information about the Interchanges browser Information displayed Level How to access in middle pane Interchange Open Interchanges Direction of the interchange browser Date and time the interchange was created Partner name Control number Interchange process status Network status Interchange acknowledgement status Message status Note If any of these components are missing or not appropriate for a particular interchange they are not displayed Group Double click an Group control number interchange Group type Group acknowledgement status Note If any of these components are missing or not appropriate for a particular group they are not displayed Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Interchanges Browser 7 4 Using Interchanges Information displayed Level How to access in middle pane Document Double click a group Document compliant status Document control number Document type Document name Reference data Document compliant status Transaction acknowledgement status Note If any of these components are missing or not appropriate for a particular document they are not displayed document Double click a Document data data document Note A screen entry translation object for that document must available
216. ior You must select a translation object from this list if you want the system to perform partner specific grouping Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Group Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box 3 49 Part Function Acknowledge Select an Acknowledgement Build Map if one exists on the Transl Obj system You must select a translation object from the Acknowledge Transl Obj list if you have created a specific translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner group When the system reconciles an acknowledgement it maps the acknowledgement to an internal file and then processes it If you need the system to process acknowledgements differently you should select an additional translation object from the Acknowledge list Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Group Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Outbound Group Entry dialog box Envelope Accesses one of the following Outbound Functional Group Envelope dialog boxes depending
217. ip you cannot delete it Also the system prevents you from deleting translation objects that are designated as system translation objects SYS or SYS System Translation Objects are all translation objects except Import Export Data Entry Screen Entry Turn Around and Print Also any translation object with system in the description is a system translation object View Displays a window containing descriptive information for the selected translation object including the following Description of the translation object Type of translation object for example Export Input and output agency for example X for ANSI X12 Input and output version for example 003030 Input and output transaction ID for example 850 Input and output release for TRADACOMS only File name of the translation object for example 3030 tpl Print Displays the Print Choice dialog box which allows you to specify whether you want to print the selected translation objects or print a summary list of the selected translation objects Note The Formatted option is unavailable because a formatted version is always printed when for a translation object Use this table to determine your next step Delete Removes the selected translation object or objects New Displays the Register Translation Object Dialog Box which allows you to identify a translation object to the system Refresh Refreshes the browser displ
218. ip The default value for this box is not checked do not expect an acknowledgement Note This check box is dimmed inactive if the transaction set is an acknowledgement Ack Translation Select the acknowledgement you want generated for this Set ID group Example ANSI X12 997 Functional Acknowledgement UCS EDIA 999 Acceptance Rejection Advice EDIFACT CNTRL Group Transl Select a partner specific Group Break Map translation Obj object if this trading partner group deviates from the normal system behavior You must select a translation object from this list if you want the system to perform partner specific grouping Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Group Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box 3 28 Using Partners Part Function Acknowledge Transl Obj Select an Acknowledgement Break Map if one exists on the system Note You must select a translation object from the Acknowledge Transl Obj list if you have created a specific translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner group When the system reconciles an acknowledgement it maps the acknowledgement to an
219. irements for processing the functional group click Advanced System response The system displays the Advanced fields on the Outbound Group Entry dialog box Recommendation Do not change the translation objects in the Group Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason to do so Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Creating an Outbound Relationship Step Action 7 Click Envelope to set up the parameters for the generation of the Functional Group segment System response The Outbound Functional Group dialog box displayed is one of the following depending on the standard you selected on the Outbound Relationship dialog box Outbound GS Functional Group Outbound UNG Functional Group Outbound BAT Functional Group 8 After you set up the required parameters in the enveloping dialog box click Save to store the information and return to the Outbound Group Entry dialog box 9 Click Save to store the information about the Outbound Group Entry dialog box and return to the Outbound Group Select dialog box 10 Highlight the new group Click Select System response Selects the group and returns to the Outbound Relationship dialog box Selecting an outbound interchange 1 On the Outbound Relationship dialog box click Interchanges System response Th
220. is box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information Interchange Communication ID Specify your BG communication identifier This ID will appear on the BG Interchange Header Note If the partner profile uses the UCS standard you must complete this box If you do not complete this box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information Interchange Password Specify a password that is agreed upon by you and your trading partner This password will appear on the BG Interchange Header Note If the partner profile uses the UCS standard you must complete this box If you do not complete this box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information Recipient Code Specify the code agreed on by you and your partner Notes Ifthe partner profile uses the TRADACOMS standard you must complete this box If you do not complete this box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information The Recipient Code is mandatory if you do not complete the Recipient Name box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f Partner Copy Dialog Box 3 84 Using Partners Part Function Recipient Name Specify your partner s name Notes Ifthe partner profile uses the TRADACOMS standard you mu
221. is partner repeat steps 4 through 7 as many times as necessary Click Exit System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Editing Partner Locations Using Partners 3 118 Editing Partner Locations Procedure To edit a partner location complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box 2 Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System User for which you want to create a location Click Locations System Response The system displays the Location Select Dialog Box 3 From the Locations list select a location Click Edit System response The system displays the Location Entry Dialog Box 4 Make any necessary changes Note The Reference Codel box must be completed 5 Click Save to save the location information and return to the Location Select dialog box OR Click Exit to return to the Location Select dialog box without saving changes 6 Click Exit System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Delete Partner Locations 3 119 Delete Partner Locations Procedure To delete
222. isplay the data in the Document Editor using a screen entry translation object select Formatted Document Note This option is not available if no screen entry translation object exists for the document To display a report of the actions the translator took on this document and list any EDI or translation object based compliance errors select Translator Report Reference See Error Messages in the Administration Guide for more information about translator reports To display the document tracking information available for a single document select Data Audit Note This function is not available if document level auditing is disabled To display information that tracks an external data file select Track Information Click OK to access the view that you specified Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Documents 4 40 Viewing a Document from the Interchange Browser Using Documents To view a document from the Interchanges or Restored Interchanges browser complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the Interchanges browser 2 Select a single document 3 Click the Data icon on the Toolbar System response The system displays the raw EDI data view of the Interchange displayed in the Data View window on the Interchanges or Restored Interchanges browser Note W
223. ist Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Outbound Translation Object dialog box Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Group Select Dialog Box Using Partners Outbound Group Select Dialog Box Introduction The Outbound Group Select dialog box is used to select an existing functional group definition to be associated with this relationship You can also use it to initiate the definition of a new functional group or to modify or delete an existing definition The groups that are available to you are determined by the version you selected on the Outbound Relationship dialog box Functional groups are required for ANSI X12 TDCC and UCS standards are optional for EDIFACT and ODETTE and are not specified for TRADACOMS Diagram The following illustrates the Outbound Group Select dialog box Outbound Group Select PETZONE x Select Exit Groups Dutbnd 3030 FA Grp Dutbnd 553030 IN Grp Parts and The following lists the parts of the Outbound Group Select dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Groups Displays all functional group definitions established for this trading partner Select Selects the indicated functional group as the one the system uses for this relationship
224. ith Gentran Server Reference See Restoring Archived Data on page 10 44 for more information about the Restored Interchanges browser Interchanges The Interchanges browser enables you to do any of the following browser View a hierarchical list of all the interchanges group and documents that were sent or received View status information for the interchanges such as whether or not a functional acknowledgement was received and the status of that acknowledgement Filter the display of interchanges Access the documents within the interchanges View external data EDI data and the related translator report if they are available Note When viewing EDI data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Interchanges Interchanges Browser Interchanges Browser Introduction The Interchanges browser enables you to view a list of all the interchanges groups and documents that were sent or received The Interchanges browser can always be accessed This browser contains status information about the interchanges such as whether or not a functional acknowledgement was received and the status of that acknowledgement Information The information about the Interchanges browser is organized in a hierarchical organization manner The following table describes the hierarchical organizat
225. ith an asterisk Field Description PartnerKEY Unique identifier for the partner TableCode For lookup this value is L TableName Descriptive name for the table This value is displayed in the table selection list Item Value that is looked up in the data during inbound or outbound processing Description Brief comment about the item Textl Text2 Text3 Text4 Additional reference information as required by the translation object using this table Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Exporting Partner Tables 3 109 Export file layout Cross reference table fields contd The following table identifies the fields in cross reference tables Mandatory fields are designated with an asterisk Field Description PartnerKEY Unique identifier for the partner TableCode For cross reference this value is C TableName Descriptive name for the table This value is displayed in the table selection list Myltem Your data value that corresponds to your partner s data value PartnerItem Your partner s data value that corresponds to your data value Description Brief comment about the item Text1 Text2 Text3 Text4 Additional reference information as required by the translation object using this table Procedure To export a partner table complete the
226. lation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner relationship e g 1f you want to change the formatted view of Inbound data Transaction Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the transaction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required Note You must select a translation object from the Transaction list if you have created a specific Transaction Break translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner relationship Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Using Partners 3 22 Part Function Acknowledge Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the transaction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required Note You must select a translation object from the Acknowledge list if you have created a specific translation object for this relationship and if you want to c
227. layed in the Archive Manager lower right pane right click the attachment and select View Data Screen from the shortcut menu external data information displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane select the external data file external data audit displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane right click the external data file and select View Data Audits from the shortcut menu external data file displayed in an external viewer right click the external data file and select View Data External Viewer from the shortcut menu Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Archived Data 10 42 Using Archive and Restore Step Action 5 contd external data file displayed in the Archive Manager lower right pane right click the external data file and select View Data Screen from the shortcut menu System response The system displays the information you requested Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Searching Archived Data 10 43 Searching Archived Data Introduction The Archive Manager Search facility enables you to quickly define parameters that are used to search all archive files or one archive file and find a specific piece
228. lecti 20 an2000 154251 fif MyCallecti 2 9 Inbox d Outbox E msa 62 E msg 63 E msg B4 UNOA 1 PETTEST1 00 PETTEST1 004950818 1202344 E msg 65 4 ORDERS 92 1 UN E msg 66 E msg 67 E msg 68 E msg 63 AD ST SHIPTO NAME SHIPTO STREETI SHIPTO STREET2 E msg 71 LIN 1 555666411 E msg 72 LARGE DOG COLLAR E msg 73 E msg 74 E msg 75 E msg 76 LIN 244555666817 E msg 77 IMD B SPRING BREEZE CAT LITTER msg 78 21 200 10 msg 79 msg 80 E LIN 3 555666908 11 AllMailbo es 20Jan2000 154053 IMD B SMALL BEEF BASTED RAWHIDE BONES External Data Spal eater Definitions J E Archives 11 Imports 20Jan2000 154650 sz External Data 4 Import sz External Data 8 Import sz External Data 9 Import zi 4 s R9 RE 8 RET 9 RET I8 T8 E E E LIN 4 555666321 IMD B X4 LARGE FOOD BOWL 21 40 123 of Ready NUM Z Parts and The following lists the parts of the Archive Manager and their functions functions Part Function File menu Exit Archive Manager Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Archive Manager Part F
229. les you to create and edit location information Diagram The following illustrates the Location Entry dialog box Location Entry PETZONE x Name m H Reference Codet Exit Reference Code2 Help Contact Address Address2 Address3 City State Country Phone Zip Code J D 3 l Fax Parts and The following lists the parts of the Location Entry dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Name Specify the name of this trading partner location This name should accurately describe the location because this box will be displayed in the location selection list Note This box is mandatory Reference Codel Specify a reference code to identify the location being defined such as a DUNS number Note This box is mandatory Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Location Entry Dialog Box 3 116 Using Partners Part Function Reference Code2 Specify a reference code to identify the location being defined such as a DUNS number Contact Specify the name of a personal contact Address1 Address2 Address3 Specify the partner s business address City Specify the partner s city State Zip Code Specify the partner s state Specify the partner s zip or postal code Country Spe
230. lifier as it will appear on the UNG group header Qualifiers are predefined by the EDI standards Note If the partner profile uses the EDIFACT or ODETTE standard you must complete this box If you do not complete this box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information Group Receiver ID Specify your partner s Group ID The value can be up to 15 characters Note If the partner profile uses the ANSI EDIFACT ODETTE UCS or TDCC standard you must complete this box If you do not complete this box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Partner Copy Dialog Box 3 83 Part Function Interchange Specify your partner s Qualifier as it will appear on the Receiver interchange header Qualifiers are predefined by the EDI Qualifier standards The value can be up to four characters Note If the partner profile uses the ANSI EDIFACT ODETTE UCS or TDCC standard you must complete this box If you do not complete this box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information Interchange Specify your partner s Interchange ID The value can be up Receiver ID to 15 characters Note If the partner profile uses the ANSI EDIFACT ODETTE UCS or TDCC standard you must complete this box If you do not complete th
231. llustrated below v Use the default Mailbox and E mail Address Mailbox GENTRAN Application Y Ewing E mail Address Editio Content Type Application EDI Set Max Number of Documents per Interchange May Noniber of Documents per merae fp Last Used Control Number Expect Acknowledgement 000000000 Hours di verdure fp Interchange Transl Obj i5 A Build Template ANSI v Acknowledge Transl Obj v Reference See Selecting an outbound interchange on page 3 73 for more information about setting parameters on the Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box Recommendation Do not change the translation objects in the Interchange Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you are certain of the result Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Defining Outbound Acknowledgement Criteria Using Acknowledgements 8 8 Step Action The requirement for receiving functional group acknowledgements is set in the Advanced section of the Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box as illustrated below Last Used Group Control Number Expect Acknowledgement Hours Overdue fp Sequence From Group last Used Conto umber m Group Transl Obj GS Build Template ANSI Y Acknowledge Transl Obj Recommendation Do not change the translation objects in the Group Transl Obj and Acknowledge
232. lter the display of external data files by action Ifyes from the Action list select the actions that you want displayed Note The default display is all actions but you can click actions to clear them and change the display Alternately you can click Unselect All Actions to clear all actions so you can then click the one or more actions to select them At least one action must be selected Ifno continue with step 7 Click OK System response The system filters the display of the external data files using the criteria you specified Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Contents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 7 1 CHAPTER 7 Using Interchanges OVetVIeW cose eso pce oper m Cep eee REO 7 2 Interchanges Browser 0 0 cee cece eee eee 7 3 Interchange Filter Dialog Box 1 2 0 0 0c eee eee 7 8 Viewing Interchanges 00 cece cece ee eens 7 10 Filtering the Display of Interchanges 7 12 Viewing Documents within Interchanges 7 14 Attaching Interchanges to a Partner 0 00000 7 16 Resending Interchanges 0000 e cece ee eens 7 18 Manually Acknowledging an Interchange Group or Document7 20 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview Overview Using Interchanges In this chapter This chapter explains how to use interchanges w
233. ly execute Reference See How to Change Controller Settings in the Administration Guide for more information about setting a limit for the number of process control events that can execute concurrently Procedure To activate an event complete the following steps activating an event Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Active Events tab Click the Events tab to display the event options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Events tab Select the suspended event that you want to activate and click Activate Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Activating and Suspending Events 11 37 Procedure To suspend an event complete the following steps suspending an event Step 1 Action Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Active Events tab Click the Events tab to display the event options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Events tab Select the activated event that you want to suspend and click Suspend Note If an event is currently processing you are not able to suspend it
234. m the Restored Interchanges browser you must use the Copy command to move the selected outbound documents to the Workspace and the compliant inbound documents to the In Documents or In Documents browsers Procedure To reprocess data complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Restored Interchanges System response The system displays the Restored Interchanges Browser Note To refresh the display of the Interchanges browser right click the middle pane and select Refresh from the shortcut menu or press F5 2 Select the documents that you wish to copy to the Workspace Browser In Documents Browser or In Documents Browser so you can reprocess and or resend them 3 From the Document menu select Copy 4 Select the appropriate browser from the cascading menu to copy the restored interchanges to that browser Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 ems Resending Restored Interchanges Using Archive and Restore 10 58 Resending Restored Interchanges Introduction To resend outbound interchanges from the Restored Interchanges browser you must use the Resend command Note You can only resend interchanges that were previously sent or that have a status of Ready to send Resend process The following table describes the process that occurs when you resend a selected interchange Stage D
235. med and as a result the In Documents and In Documents are updated with any data received Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Sending All Documents 5 8 Using Communications Procedure To send all documents complete the following steps Method 2 Step 1 Action From the appropriate area of The Desk select Out Documents System response The system displays the Out Documents Summary dialog box Note If the documents to be sent are not in the Out Documents you must post the documents from the Workspace to the Out Documents Reference See Posting Documents on page 4 53 for more information Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Documents Browser Do not select any documents If any documents are selected press CTRL and click the primary mouse button to deselect them Click Send System response The system displays the Gentran Server for Windows dialog box Click Yes to start the transmission session Note All the documents in the Out Documents are sent to the appropriate mailboxes Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Communications Resending Documents Resending Documents Introduction After a document is successfully enveloped and sent it is stored in the Out Draw
236. ment Dialog Box Introduction The Choose File to Export Document dialog box enables you to specify the name of the file to which the system exports the selected document Notes There must be a system export translation object for the document or a partner specific export translation object for the document The Export function is only valid when one or more documents are selected from one of the following browsers In Documents In Drawer or In Documents Diagram The following illustrates the Choose File to Export Document dialog box Choose file to Export document Look in E Exports l e z File name Files of type Text files txt Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Choose File to Export Document dialog box functions and their functions Part Function Look in Select the folder where the system should look for the file Displays the current File name Specify the name of the export file Files of type Select the type of file Open Executes the selected function exits the dialog box Cancel Exits the dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Application Files to Import Dialog Box Using Documents Application Files to Import Dialog Box Introduction The Application Files to Import dialog box enables you to import data from an external application
237. moved to the Out Drawer and the interchange status is set to Sent Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Communications Send Queue Browser Send Queue Browser Introduction The Send Queue browser contains a list of documents that are currently queued for the system to send Note To delete a document that is in the Send Queue you must open the Interchanges Browser and delete the document from there Diagram The following illustrates the Send Queue browser Queue 3 Partner Type Name Status RefData PETZONE 810 Queued PETZONE2 INVOIC 2112222 Queued 222212 PETZONE2 INVOIC 2113114 Queued 955 3 Documents 1 selected Parts and The following lists the parts of the Send Queue browser and their functions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box which allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print the selected document Refresh Refreshes the display of the browser Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Communications Session Dialog Box Using Communications 5 4 Communications Session Dialog Box Introduction The Communications Session dialog box enables you to select mailboxes and initiate a communications session to send and receive d
238. mport Accesses the Application Files to Import Dialog Box which allows you to import data from an external application file Note Depending on the content of the file the system may prompt you for partner transaction or translation object information The Import function does not affect any selected documents Refresh Refreshes the browser display Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Out Documents Browser 4 14 Out Documents Browser Using Documents Introduction The Out Documents browser contains a list of documents that are ready to be sent After the documents are successfully sent they are automatically transferred to the Out Drawer Diagram The following illustrates the Out Documents browser Out Documents PETZONE 810 5 Pate Type Name Status 810 PETZONE PETZONE PETZONE PETZONE PETZONE 5 Documents 000000000E 0000000007 ooo0000008 000000009 OK 1 selected Bk View Print Delete Erpat Send UnPost Refresh Close Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Out Documents browser and their functions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box which allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print the selected docume
239. n Diagram The following illustrates the Inbound Group Entry dialog box with the Advanced options displayed Inbound Group Entry PETZONE1 xj A Save Description Standard E EDIFACT Exit Version 092001 Functional Group ID f Sequence Checking Last Used Group Control Numbe eo TOHE eie alae IV Acknowledge Group C het Ack Transaction Set ID C Incremental Chronological Group Transl Obj Acknowledge Transl Obj JACKBUILD_CONTRL Parts and The following lists the parts of the Inbound Group Entry dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Description Specify the name of the functional group description Standard Displays the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship definition Version Displays the version of the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box 3 26 Using Partners Part Function Functional Group ID Specify the functional group These identification boxes are defined by each appropriate standards group to group like documents The standard defines which functional group ID should be used with each document type This is a mandatory box Examples IN 810 X12 Invoice PO 850 X12 Purchase Order IG 830 UCS Invoice OG 875 U
240. n Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 D Gentran EDI Archive Definition Dialog Box 10 12 Using Archive and Restore Part Function Delete Deletes the selected Gentran EDI criteria from the system Warning The system removes the criteria without prompting you to confirm the deletion Partner Displays the partner profile ID Direction Displays the direction of the interchanges Days Old Displays the age of the interchanges Processed Status Displays the processed status of the interchanges The default is All Network Status Displays the network status of the interchanges The default selection is All Acknowledgement Status Displays the acknowledgement status of the interchanges The default is All Overdue groups and Displays whether overdue groups and interchanges Interchanges are archived The default is No Save Saves the archive definition and exits the Gentran EDI Archive Definition dialog box Cancel Exits the Gentran EDI Archive Definition dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Interchange Selection Criteria Dialog Box D 10 13 Interchange Selection Criteria Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Interchange Selection Criteria dialog box Interchange Selection Criteria
241. na oe 4 20 View Choice Dialog BOX 1 6 ttt nee eens 4 20 Print Choice Dialog Box 0 0 ett ne 4 22 Select Export Method Dialog Box 0 ccc cc eens 4 23 Choose File to Export Document Dialog Box 0 eee ee eee 4 25 Application Files to Import Dialog Box 0 0 cece eee 4 26 Document Search Dialog Box 0 0 6 ees 4 27 b Filter Dialog Box eae ia eae dre idk REOR eee e S eA 4 29 Creating and Editing Documents 0 cece cece e cece cece eens 4 31 Creating Documents 00 cect ttn t eens 4 31 Opening and Editing Documents nsaan sansara anra 4 35 Managing Documents ssssssesossssssesosossssesesesesesososo 4 38 Viewing Documents 0 cece eee rn 4 38 Viewing Currently Processing Documents 0 0 cece eens 4 4 Finding Specific Text ina Document 0 00 eee 4 42 Searching for Documents 0 00 ett teens 4 45 Sorting Documents 0 ehh rrr 4 46 Filtering Out Drawer Documents by Status 2 0 eee ee eee 4 47 Deleting Documents 0 0 eer 4 48 Printing Documents nunana anaana nanea 4 49 Routing Documents eueddxvexeukexkr m A RARO N ERA RIO TORRE ROC n 4 51 Moving Documents to the In Drawer ssssseee eh 4 51 Copying a Document to Reprocess and Resend 00 c eee eee ee 4 52 amp Posting Documents iesu erogen era eon cba had E RR
242. nal Data Summary Viewer is organized in a organization hierarchical manner as shown below Level How to access Information displayed Externaldata Open External Data File path and name file Summary Viewer Date and time the file was numbered created Documentor Double click an external Document or interchange Interchange data file control number Associated partner Document type Acknowledgement status Document name Reference data Date and time the document was created Note If any of these components are missing or not appropriate for a particular group they are not displayed External Data You can perform the following functions on the External Data Summary Viewer Summary Filter the display of external data by date time and action from the External functions Data Filter dialog box Display the external data raw EDI data and translator report data for the selected external data file in the appropriate browser panes Print a selected item Delete the external data file from the External Data folder Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 External Data Summary Viewer Using External Data 6 4 Diagram The following illustrates the External Data Summary Viewer with external data EDI data and translator report options turned on Actions Date T ime Checking is Off 1 E GENSRYNTTutorial Pet_810
243. nctions functions Part Function list Displays all scheduled events Controller Select the controller whose events you want filtered Sort Select how you want the list of events sorted IF you sort by THEN the events are listed description the in alphabetic order of the event default descriptions controller in alphabetic order by controller Note For each controller the events are listed in alphabetic order by event description status by currently processing events first red indicator activated events second green indicator and suspended events third yellow indicator Note Within each status the events are listed in alphabetic order by event description Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 11 18 Using Process Control Part Function Seconds Specify the interval in seconds at which you want the system to refresh the dialog box default is 20 seconds Auto Refresh Indicate whether you want the Process Control dialog box to automatically refresh so you do not have to click Refresh New Accesses the Event Setup dialog box so you can create a new event entry Edit Accesses the Event Setup dialog box so you can modify the selected event entry Delete Deletes the selected event entry Activate Suspend Ifa selected event is suspended yellow indicato
244. ned in this manual Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Getting Support Introduction The Sterling Commerce Gentran Server software is supported by trained product support personnel who are available to help you with product questions or concerns Note Gentran Server Customer Support does not support non Sterling Commerce products such as SQL Server and Oracle but can assist you in configuring non Sterling Commerce products to work with Gentran Server Phone number For assistance please refer to the Getting Started Guide to determine which support phone number you should use Before calling To help us provide prompt service we ask that you do the following support Attempt to recreate any problem that you encounter and record the exact sequence of events When you call product support you should be prepared to provide us with the information below Information Identification Description Your company name your name telephone number and extension and the case number if the question refers to a previously reported issue System Configuration System Data Store The Gentran Server version and any service packs installed and information about the primary Gentran system controller and all machines experiencing problems including the Windows operating system version amount of memory available disk space database version Microso
245. ner Ifyes see Creating Partner Locations on page 3 117 Ifno you have completed the partner profile definition process Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Partner Editor Dialog Box Using Partners 3 6 Partner Editor Dialog Box Introduction The Partner Editor enables you to define edit and delete all partner information for your company and all of your trading partners Diagram The following illustrates the Partner Editor dialog box Partner Editor Ox Select a Partner Internal System User Edit Ne Delete Inbound Outbound Tables Locations Refresh Help aa a Exe Litani Eun EE pu Em BHe m Processes Parts and The following lists the parts of the Partner Editor dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Select a Partner Displays the list of partner profiles to select from Copy Displays the Partner Copy Dialog Box which allows you to copy a partner profile Import Displays the Import File Select Dialog Box which allows you to import a partner profile Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Partner Editor Dialog Box Part Function Export Displays the Export File Build Dialog Box which allows
246. ner Tables Dialog Box 3 Select the table you want to delete Click Delete System response The system displays the Confirm Delete dialog box 4 Click Yes to complete the deletion System Response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Exporting Partner Tables Using Partners 3 108 Exporting Partner Tables Introduction Export file layout The Table Export function allows you to export partner cross reference and lookup tables to a sequential file This allows you to define a table for one trading partner and copy that table to another partner profile Reference See the Partner File Layouts appendix in the Administration Guide for more information Typically you export and then import tables created for another partner profile However if necessary you can build tables outside of Gentran Server by formatting your data in the export file layout The export file layout is a free format ASCII text file Each field must be delimited separated with Hex01 because the field lengths are variable Note You can create the file with a text editor such as Notepad The default file extension for a lookup export file is Ikp The default file extension for a cross reference file is xrf Lookup table fields The following table identifies the fields in lookup tables Mandatory fields are designated w
247. nfirm New Password does not match the New Password you will be prompted to type it again Once complete click OK to save the changes System response The system is updated and the next time you log on to the system you will need to enter the new password Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Contents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 2 1 CHAPTER 2 Using Translation Objects OVEIVICW ose ented oar pU eese esed ee ee bape 2 2 EDI Translation Object Browser 0 0 00 cece eee 2 3 Register Translation Object Dialog Box 005 2 6 Registering New Translation Objects 2 0200 2 7 Deleting Translation Objects 2 8 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview Overview In this chapter Translation object definition Creating translation objects Types of translation objects Using Translation Objects This chapter describes how to use translation objects with Gentran Server A translation object is a set of definitions links and rules that combine to provide the translator with all the information necessary to convert data from one format to another Translation objects are used in Gentran Server to control the processing of the translator subsystem Translation objects are created by compiling an application map or a form definition using the Application or Forms Integration subsyst
248. nformation may not appear Document Double click a group document compliant status document control number document type document name reference data document compliant status transaction acknowledgement status Note If any of these components are missing or not appropriate for a particular document they are not displayed document Double click a document document data data Note A screen entry translation object for that document must available on your system Browser You can perform the following functions on the Restored Interchanges browser functions p Filter the display of interchanges by date partner and direction inbound and outbound from the Interchanges Filter dialog box Display the external data raw EDI data and translator report data for the selected interchange or document in the appropriate browser panes Note When viewing raw EDI or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Toggle the status of interchanges between Ready to Send and Hold Print or delete a selected item Note You might want to use the toggle function if you do not want to send an interchange right away Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 LE Restored Interchanges Browser Using Archive and Restore 10 48 Diagram The following illustrates t
249. ning date of a date range from which the system should filter the display of interchanges Note The Date From box is only active if the No Date Time Checking check box is not selected Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Interchanges Interchange Filter Dialog Box Part Function Date To Select the end date of a date range from which the system should filter the display of interchanges Note The Date To box is not active if either the No Date Time Checking check box is selected or if the Always Current check box is selected Always Current Indicate that the end date for the date range 1s always the current system date and time Note The Always Current check box is only active if the No Date Time Checking check box is not selected No Date Time Indicate if the system filters the display of interchanges by Checking date and time if selected Partner Contains a list of all partner profiles on your system This list allows you to filter the display of interchanges by the partners you specify Note The default display is all partners but you can click on partner profiles to clear them Unselect All Clears all partner profiles Partners Note This allows you to filter the display of interchange by the partners you specify Warning At least one partner must be selected InBound Select the direction of traffic inbound and outbound fo
250. nse The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Calendars Overview Introduction Process Control dialog box Calendars tab Calendars tab parts and functions Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Overview 11 39 The process control Calendar feature enables you to configure system calendars that excludes specific dates such as holidays or days of the week from processing Like session definitions these calendars are defined independently from the event so that they can be attached to multiple event entries The calendar begins with the current month and year The following illustrates the Calendars tab of the Process Control dialog box EA HE Gentran Server Process Control Active Events Events Calendars Sessions Calendar Invoice 000 ee February 2000 Exclude el Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fi Sat mo s 1 2 X3 4 5 Hos Saves 6 7 8 89 10 d 12 138 0 15 X ne 17 18 19 T Tuesday um 20 21 22 28 S524 25 I Wednesday Ker 3 2 v Thursday Friday CXPPIEVIGUS Next gt gt T Saturday 3 Cancel Help The following lists the parts of the Process Control dialog box Calendars tab and their functions Part Function Calendars list Displays a list of all defined calendars Calendar Displays the current
251. nt Delete Deletes the selected document Export Not a valid function from this browser Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Out Documents Browser Part Function Send Accesses the Send Receive dialog box which enables you to manually start a communications session to send data Notes Only selected documents will be enveloped and sent If no documents are selected then a documents will be sent Successfully sent documents will be moved to the Out Drawer Initiating a Send session also prompts the system to receive any documents that are waiting to be received The Send function is only valid if Out Documents is the currently selected browser and documents are present or if interchanges in the Interchanges browser have a Ready status UnPost Moves the selected document back to the Workspace browser Refresh Refreshes the display of the browser Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Out Documents Browser Using Documents 4 16 Out Documents Browser Introduction The Out Documents browser contains a list of documents that were imported into the system but are invalid Diagram The following illustrates the Out Documents browser 0ut Documents
252. nt contractor or subcontractor subject to the FARs this documentation is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS under Title 48 CFR 52 227 19 Further as and when provided to any governmental entity government contractor or subcontractor subject to DFARs this documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software it describes are provided pursuant to the customary Sterling Commerce license as described in Title 48 CFR 227 7202 with respect to commercial software and commercial software documentation These terms of use shall be governed by the laws of the State of Ohio USA without regard to its conflict of laws provisions If you are accessing the Sterling Commerce Software under an executed agreement then nothing in these terms and conditions supersedes or modifies the executed agreement Product names mentioned herein may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective companies Gentran and Gentran Server are registered trademarks of Sterling Commerce Inc Third Party Software Portions of the Sterling Commerce Software may include products or may be distributed on the same storage media with products Third Party Software offered by third parties Third Party Licensors Warranty Disclaimer This documentation and the Sterling Commerce Software which it describes are licensed either AS IS or with a limited warranty as set forth in the Sterling Commerce license agreement Other than any limited warranties provided NO OTHER WAR
253. nt to locate 6 Do you want the system to search for case sensitive text fyes select the Match Case check box and continue with step 7 Ifno continue with step 7 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Finding Specific Text in a Document Using Documents 4 44 Step Action 7 Click Find Next to find the first occurrence of the specified text Notes Ifthe system locates that text it is highlighted in the data view window Ifthe system does not find the specified text the system beeps If this 1s the case skip to step 7 8 Continue clicking Find Next to find each subsequent occurrence of that text 9 Click Cancel System response The system returns to the data view window Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Searching for Documents Searching for Documents Introduction The Document Search facility enables you to quickly and easily locate specific documents in the system This facility returns the available tracking information for each matching document Procedure To search for documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Commands menu select Document Search System response The system displays the Document Search Dialog Box 2 Enter the appropriate criteria 3 Click Search System res
254. nterchange ID should be used with each standard This is a mandatory box Example ANSIXI2 ISA ICS UCS BG EDIFACT UNB Tradacoms STX Use the default Mailbox and E mail Address Specify that the system will use the default Mailbox and E mail address specified on the Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box Mailbox New Mailbox Specify a mailbox to use to identify this partner for RosettaNet relationships Or click New Mailbox to display the Create New Mailbox wizard which allows you to create a new mailbox Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Edit Mailbox E mail Address Specify an e mail address to identify this partner for RosettaNet relationships Or click Edit Mailbox to display the Mailbox Properties dialog box which allows you to edit the mailbox Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Content Type Specify the content type of the interchange Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 E Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box 3 54 Using Partners Part Function Set Max Number Instruct the system to only allow the specified maximum of Documents per number of documents per interchange for this relationship Interchange Max Number of Specify the maximum number of documents allowed per Documents per interchang
255. ntran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Importing Documents Importing Documents Introduction Additional configuration task Procedure Gentran Server allows you to import data from data files as an alternative to using the Document Editor to enter data directly into the system To import a document you must have a system import and or import translation object for the transaction set that is imported registered with the system Reference See Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 for more information For each type of import file you need to define an import specification on the Import tab in the System Configuration program that indicates which import or system import translation object is used to begin translation during the import process You need to see your system administrator about adding the UNC file path or file name to the System Configuration program if either of the following are true because the system may be unable to import the file You select a file from a UNC file path and a local drive is specified for imports of that file type in the System Configuration program You select a file from a local drive and a UNC filename is specified for imports of that type in the System Configuration program Reference See How to Edit an Import Specification in the Administration Guide for more information about adding import specifications To import a document complete the foll
256. ntran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box Using Partners 3 46 Part Function Version Displays the version of the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship Functional Group Specifies the functional group These identification boxes ID are defined by each appropriate standards group to group like documents The standard defines which functional group ID should be used with each document type This is a mandatory box Examples IN 810 X12 Invoice PO 850 X12 Purchase Order IG 830 UCS Invoice OG 875 UCS P O INVOIC EDIFACT INVOIC ORDERS EDIFACT ORDERS INVOIC Tradacoms INVOIC ORDERS Tradacoms ORDERS This element is located in ANSI X12 GS01 EDIFACT UNGOI TRADACOMS BAT Last Used Group Specify a value that is used to generate the next Control Number interchange control number The number generated will always be one more than the number in this box This box will initially be set to zero Note To ensure that functional acknowledgements work correctly you must define a unique control number for each group relationship that exists for the same partner relationship Expect Instruct the system to expect a functional Acknowledgement acknowledgement to be received from this trading partner as a result of your partner receiving the group defined in this relationship The default value for this box is not
257. object to verify if the document is compliant with the standard and translate from EDI to print or application format Transaction Remove the EDI specific enveloping around a single document Group Remove the EDI specific enveloping around a set of related transactions the transactions do not have to be the same type Interchange Remove the EDI specific enveloping around groups destined for the same trading partner Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Using Partners 3 16 Diagram The following illustrates the Inbound Translation Object dialog box with the Advanced options displayed I inbound Translation Objects PETZONE PET X 3030 850 Export D 0 5 JH ST Break Template f Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Parts and The following lists the parts of the Inbound Translation Object dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Turn Around Auto Displays all turnaround document options When a document is received the turnaround document created is the natural response document that contains as many elements from the received document as possible Note Select the Auto check box if you want the defined turnar
258. of file Note The default file extension for cross reference tables is xrf and for lookup tables is lkp Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 se Table Import File Select Dialog Box Using Partners 3 102 Part Function Open Begins the import process for the selected partner table file Cancel Cancels the action and exits the dialog box Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Creating Partner Tables 3 103 Creating Partner Tables Procedure To create a partner table complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System User for which you want to create a Cross reference or Lookup table Click Tables System Response The system displays the Partner Tables Dialog Box Click New System response The system displays the New Table Dialog Box In the Table Name box type the unique table name Note The table name must be the same as the name used in the translation object that requires the table If your database is case sensitive when you reference the table using standard or extended rules you must type the
259. ofile before you copy it See Exporting Partner Profiles on page 3 87 for more information If you do not know which EDI standard that partner profile uses check the profile to obtain that information before you export and copy it The following illustrates the Partner Copy dialog box Partner Copy Partner Copy Dialog Box 3 82 Parts and functions Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Using Partners The following lists the parts of the Partner Copy dialog box and their functions Part Profile ID Function Specify a unique identifier for the selected partner Select Partner Accesses the Import File Select Dialog Box which allows you to select a partner profile to copy Name Specify a unique name for the partner Note Make this name as descriptive as possible because this is the name displayed in the partner selection list EDI Code Specify the EDI identifier for this partner The system uses this value during inbound processing to select the correct trading partner definition Application Code Default Mailbox Specify an application code used to identify this partner The system uses this value during outbound import processing to select the correct trading partner definition Select the mailbox to identify this partner Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Group Receiver Qualifier Specify your partner s Qua
260. ok for the file you specify and then execute the command based on whether the file is found or not found If Docs Are In the Location Below the system must look for the documents in the location you specify and then execute the command based on whether or not the documents are found in that location Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Creating Sessions EE 11 9 Creating Sessions Procedure To create a process control session complete the following steps Step Action Creating a session 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box 2 Click the Sessions tab to access the sessions options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Sessions tab 3 Click New System response The system displays the New Session dialog box 4 In the Session Name box type in the new session name using alphanumeric characters Note The dash character is also allowed 5 Click OK to add the new session Building the session script 1 With the new session currently selected click Ins to insert a command above the current line System response The system displays the Action Setup dialog box This dialog box allows you to create script commands 2 From the Command list select a command Note The Command
261. ols menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box 2 Click Copy System response The system displays the Partner Copy Dialog Box 3 Click Select Partner System response The system displays the Import File Select Dialog Box 4 Select the file you want to copy by doing the following Navigate to the folder using the Look in list Type the file name in the File name box 5 Click Open to copy that partner Note The system displays the model partner profile name in the title bar of the Partner Copy dialog box The default file extension for exported partners is par Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Copying Partner Profiles Step Action On the Partner Copy dialog box type a unique profile identifier in the Profile ID box In the Name box type the partner name In the EDI Code box type the EDI identifier for this partner Note The system uses this identifier during inbound processing to select the correct partner If necessary in the Application Code box type an application code to identify this partner Note The system uses this identifier during outbound import processing to select the correct partner Select the appropriate mailbox from the Default Mailbox list Note See the Communications User s Guide
262. on document information message information gt attachment information external data information data audit information tracking information Displays the content of the selected interchange document attachment or external data file Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Gentran EDI Archive Definition Dialog Box D 10 11 Gentran EDI Archive Definition Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Gentran EDI Archive Definition dialog box Gentran EDI Archive Definition Name PC I Delete Data After Archive r Selection Criteria Low Edit Delete Partner Direction Days Old Processed Status Network Status Acknowledgement Status Overdue groups and Interchanges Parts and The following lists the parts of the Gentran EDI Archive Definition dialog box functions and their functions Part Function Name Specify the name of the archive definition file Note This name must be unique Delete Data After Tell the system to remove the interchange data after Archive archiving it Add Accesses the Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box and enables you to define new archive criteria Edit Accesses the Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box for the selected criteria and enables you to modify the archive criteria Continued on next page Gentra
263. on or if the specified file does not exist 11 Click OK System response The command is saved and you return to the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Editing Sessions 11 14 Using Process Control Step Action 12 Repeat Steps 4 through 11 until you finish adding commands to the session script Use Up and Down if you need to resequence the commands in the script Note Ifyou need to edit a command in a script select that command and click Edit Ifyou need to delete a command from a script select that command and click Delete 13 Click Save to save the new session script Note If you want to save the session under another name click SaveAs type the new session name and click OK 14 Click OK to exit the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Deleting Sessions Deleting Sessions 11 15 Introduction Ifan event calls a session that is currently processing or is activated you are unable to delete the session until the event has either finished processing or you suspend the event Reference See Procedure suspending an event on page 11 37 for more information Procedure To delete a session complete the following
264. ontinued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Outbound Relationship Using Partners 3 70 Step Action 6 From the appropriate drop down lists on the Outbound Relationship dialog box select the following Standard Version Transaction Set Release for TRADACOMS only Notes The contents of these lists are displayed from the translation objects registered in Gentran Server For example if there are no translation objects for ANSI X12 version 003040 registered with Gentran you will not be able to select that version on this dialog box The information required for this dialog box should be provided to you by your trading partner when this partner defines the details of the transactions they send you 7 If you need to define parameters to comply with the processing needs of your partner such as Last Used Control Number Expect Acknowledgement Hours Overdue Duplicate Documents or Test Indicator click Advanced System response The system displays the Advanced fields on the Outbound Relationship dialog box Selecting a transaction envelope mandatory for EDIFACT ODETTE and TRADACOMS standards optional for ANSI UCS and TDCC 1 If you are using the EDIFACT ODETTE or TRADACOMS standard click Envelope to complete the envelope header information Note For the ANSI UCS and TDCC standards the envelop
265. or External Data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu To view the related external data of a single selected interchange Select View gt Interchanges gt Related External Data Note When viewing raw EDI or External Data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu To print a selected document or translation report Select File gt Print To delete a selected document Select Document gt Delete To copy the document to the appropriate browser Select Document gt Copy 2 Select the appropriate browser from the submenu In Documents or In Documents Browser for compliant Inbound documents Workspace Browser for outbound documents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Attaching Interchanges to a Partner Using Interchanges 7 16 Attaching Interchanges to a Partner Introduction The Attach to Partner dialog box can be accessed when the Interchanges browser is active and one interchange is selected The Attach function enables you to link the interchanges to a partner Use this function if you received documents that did not have an identifiable partner and are now listed without a partner in the In Documents browser Note The interchanges for these documents are listed without a partner in the Interch
266. or interchange selected The information displayed depends on the level Note To select multiple items press and hold the CTRL key while selecting the items Torefresh the display of the Interchanges browser right click the middle pane and select Refresh from the shortcut menu or press F5 upper right pane External Data Displays the data file used in translation if this option is selected from the View Restored Interchanges menu Notes This option only available if a single item is selected from the detailed list This option is not available if the external data file used in translation does not exist When viewing raw EDI or External Data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu middle right pane Gentran Data Displays the data in EDI format if this option is selected from the View Restored Interchanges menu Notes This option only available if a single item is selected from the detailed list When viewing raw EDI or External Data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu lower right pane Translator Report Displays a report of the actions the translator took on this document and lists any EDI or translation object based compliance errors if this option is selected from the View Restored Interchanges menu Note This option only available if
267. ork VAN A service such as Sterling Information Broker that accepts and holds transmissions from companies until it is convenient for a trading partner to accept them Non repudiation is the ability of a message transfer system to provide unforgeable evidence that a specific action occurred The following are the three most common types of non repudiation services Non repudiation of origin Protects against any attempt by a message originator to deny sending a message Non repudiation of submission Protects against any attempt by a message transfer agent to deny that a message was submitted for delivery Non repudiation of delivery Protects against any attempt by a message recipient to deny receiving a message The Organization for Data Exchange by Tele Transmission based in Europe This browser contains a list of documents that are ready to be sent After the documents are successfully sent they are automatically transferred to the Out Drawer This browser contains a list of documents that were successfully sent by the system Another firm with which your company trades documents Also referred to as a trading partner This function enables you to define edit and delete partner information for your company and your trading partners Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide GL 9 post This function enables you to move compliant documents from the Workspa
268. orting Partner Tables 2 0 esses 3 111 Using Partner Locations 0 ccc cece cece cere rere n nnn 3 113 D Overviews en isa o OUR Seas So eb OR de Oe Pa 3 113 Location Select Dialog Box 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee 3 114 Location Entry Dialog Box 0 c eee eee ee 3 115 Creating Partner Locations 000 cee less 3 117 Editing Partner Locations 000 c eee eee ee eee 3 118 Delete Partner Locations eese 3 119 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Introduction Introduction In this chapter This chapter explains how to use the Gentran Server Partner Editor including Using partner profiles Routing partner profiles Using partner tables Using partner locations Partner Editor The Partner Editor allows you to define edit and delete all partner relationship information for your company and all of your trading partners Partner relationships allow you to send and receive data to and from your trading partners The Partner Editor also allows you to use an internal system partner Internal System User to define your company to the system Gentran Server See Using Partner Editor with Gentran Server for RosettaNet in the for RosettaNet Gentran Server for RosettaNet User Guide for more information about defining partners for use with RosettaNet Gentran Server for Windows Use
269. oss reference lookup or location attached to the partner profile are also imported Reference See the Partner File Layouts appendix in the Administration Guide for more information You must create a mailbox for the partner prior to loading the partner profile Please see the Communications Guide for more information To import a partner profile complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box 2 Click Import System response The system displays the Import File Select Dialog Box 3 Select the partner file by doing the following Navigate to the folder using the Look in drop down list Select the file or type the file name in the File name box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Importing Partner Profiles 3 86 Using Partners Step Action Click Open System response The system displays the Import dialog box Note This dialog box allows you verify this partner is the correct one Click Save to continue If you are prompted to enter additional partner information enter that information and click Save System response The system imports the partner details 1f they do not already exist on the system and any relationships for which there are translation objects During thi
270. ot or a summary list of selected documents Ifyes select a document or group of documents and click Print and continue with step 5 System response The system displays the Print Choice Dialog Box Ifno continue with step 6 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Printing Documents Using Documents Step Action On the Print Choice Dialog Box select one of the following options and click OK To print selected unformatted documents select the Selected Items option If you want the selected documents printed as formatted a print translation object must exist for the documents to be printed as formatted select the Selected Items option and the Formatted check box If you are printing from the In Documents Browser or In Documents Browser you can either move the document to the In Drawer Browser or leave the document in place To print a summary list of selected documents select the Summary List of Items option System response The system displays the Print dialog box On the Print dialog box set the appropriate options and click OK Note The system displays the Print dialog box if you either selected no documents from the browser and clicked Print or if you chose Summary List of Items from the Print Choice dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows Us
271. ote The Post function can only be used when the Workspace is active Procedure To post a document or group of documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the Workspace System response The system displays the Workspace Browser 2 Select the compliant documents that you want to move to the Out Documents Browser Note A document is designated compliant if the Status column contains OK If the Status column contains NotOk the document is not compliant and is not posted 3 Click Post System response The selected documents are moved to the Out Documents Browsers Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 UnPosting Documents 4 54 Using Documents UnPosting Documents Introduction The UnPost function moves a selected document or group of documents to the Workspace Browser You can use UnPost to prevent a document from being sent to a trading partner or to allow the document to be modified before it is sent The UnPost function can only be used when the Out Documents Browser is the active browser Note If you modify the document you must repost it before the system sends it Procedure To UnPost a document or group of documents complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the Out Documents System response The system displays the
272. other than 8 bit ASCII Gentran Server for Windows supports the processing of an encoded interchange as long as the encoding of the interchange matches the default code page of the operating system where Gentran Server is running The following illustrates the Inbound Interchange Entry dialog box with the Advanced options displayed Inbound Interchange Entry PETZONE Eg Description Inbound 3030 PO Int Exit Standard Version lt lt Advanced Interchange ID Help Sequence Checking La Usad Bontrall umber ee eee None o00000000 C Duplicate ACK Tiahsaction serip Incremental C Chronological Interchange Transl Obj Acknowledge Transl Obj Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Using Partners 3 32 Parts and The following lists the parts of the Inbound Interchange Entry dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Description Contains the name of the interchange description Standard Displays the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship definition Version Displays the version of the EDI standard the system is using for this relationship Interchange ID Select the type of interchange The standard defines which interchange ID should be used with each standard This is a mandatory box Example ANSIXI2 ISA ICS UCS BG EDIFACT UNB Tradacoms
273. ound process to be automatic If the Auto box is not selected the received document will remain in the In Documents until it is selected for processing Export File Auto Displays all registered Export translation objects relative to the Standard Version Transaction Set and Release defined by this relationship This allows you to specify that when an EDI document is received it will be exported into an output file Notes Select the Auto check box if you want the export file created automatically upon receipt of the document If the Auto box is not selected the received document will remain in the In Documents until it is selected for processing Ifthe Export File Name is defined for this relationship each document can be exported individually to a unique file If you use formatting characters in the file name the document key changes for each document that is exported the Process ID stays the same for all documents exported from the same interchange and the unique ID changes Therefore using the document key and unique ID special characters defined below a unique file name can be derived Reference See Export File Name on page 3 18 for more information about these values Print Displays all print translation objects on the system for the Standard Version Transaction Set and Release defined by the relationship The selected translation object will be used to print documents receiv
274. owing steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the Workspace System response The system displays the Workspace Browser 2 Click Import System response The system displays the Application Files to Import dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Importing Documents 4 58 Using Documents Step Action Select the file or files to be imported and click Open System response The system imports the documents into the Workspace Browser The documents either have an OK status the documents were successfully read and compliance checked or a NotOK status the documents failed compliance checking Note You may not send non compliant documents either delete those documents and reprocess them from the data file or correct the documents in the Document Editor if you have Screen Entry translation objects for them Reference See Opening and Editing Documents on page 4 35 for more information about correcting the documents in the Document Editor Important If you import a file and no documents are displayed in the Workspace Browser check the Audit Log Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Exporting Documents Exporting Documents Introduction To export a document to a data file an export tr
275. ows User s Guide In Documents Out Documents acknowledgement ack AIAG ANA ANSI application system asynchronous audit log Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide GL 1 GLOSSARY Glossary This browser contains a list of documents that were received by the system but failed compliance checking or that do not have an identifiable partner or transaction set This browser contains a list of documents that were imported into the system but are invalid Indicates the ANSI 997 functional acknowledgement the EDIA 999 acceptance rejection advice and the EDIFACT CNTRL This function enables you to manually change the status of documents in the Out Drawer to Ack d acknowledged The Automotive Industry Action Group AIAG is the standards setting group for the automotive industry The standards form a subset of the ANSI X12 standard Article Numbering Association American National Standards Institute ANSI sets standards for many products and services The ANSI X12 committee is the main EDI standards setting organization for the United States Computer systems designed to fulfill specific business functions These include accounting purchasing materials control human resources shipping and other systems Communication among distributed processes in which data can be transmitted intermittently rather than in a steady stream This function enables you to view system audit log information Gentr
276. ox Reference If you need to define a calendar see Creating and Editing Calendars on page 11 41 Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Creating New Events mms 11 25 Step Action 5 Do you want to select a day or days of the week on which you want this session to be scheduled Ifyes click the check box next to the days on which the event should be run and continue with Step 6 Ifno continue with Step 6 Note By default every day of the week is selected If any days are selected in this section then the schedule is executed only on those days If you select days from this section you cannot use the Date box 6 Do you want to specify a day in which you want this session to run one time only Ifyes type that date in the Date box and continue with Saving the event on page 11 26 Ifno continue with Saving the event on page 11 26 Note This box enables you to specify a date on which this session should run one time only The system then removes the session from the database If you type a date in this box you cannot select from the days of the week check boxes Format You can enter this date in any format but the sequence of the date you enter must correspond to the international Windows date formats for example in the United States dates must be entered in MM DD YY format an
277. ox is used to specify which translation objects are used to process the data defined by this relationship The following lists the outbound translation levels from the lowest level up Translation Level Description Document Translate from import format or data entry to EDI Transaction Build the EDI specific enveloping around a single document Group Build the EDI specific enveloping around a set of related transactions the transactions do not have to be the same type Interchange Build the EDI specific enveloping around groups destined for the same trading partner Diagram The following illustrates the Outbound Translation Object dialog box with the Advanced options displayed Outbound Translation Objects PETZONE x Select Translation Objects Import ackgui LD 337 m Print m m Data Entry Application ID Application Alias Value 997 Additional Translation Objects Tum round Export Transaction st Build Template ANSI Acknowledge Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box Parts and The following lists the parts of the Outbound Translation Object dialog box and functions their functions Part Function Import Displays all import translation objects in the system for the Standard Version Transaction Set and Rele
278. page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents View Choice Dialog Box m Al Part Function Translator Displays a report of the actions the translator took on this Report document and lists any EDI or translation object based compliance errors Reference See Error Messages in the Administration Guide for more information about translator reports Data Audit Displays the document tracking information that is available for a single document Note This function is not available if document level auditing is disabled Tracking Displays information that tracks an external data file Information OK Executes the selected function exits the dialog box Cancel Exits the dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Print Choice Dialog Box Using Documents 4 22 Print Choice Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Parts and functions The Print Choice dialog box enables you to specify whether you want to print the selected item document or translation object or a summary list of all items in the browser The following illustrates the Print Choice dialog box Print Choice x Selected Items Formatted L Fone Cancel Help v Move documents to In Drawer C Summary List of Items The following lists the parts of the Print Choice dialog
279. peration displays a completion message 14 Click OK System Response The system returns to the Partner Copy dialog box 15 Click Exit to return to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 3 92 Using Partners Using Partner Tables Overview Introduction Table use Using tables The translation process allows you to set up tables to use information in the Partner database when a document is entered into the system either from a file or from the Document Editor facility The Partner Editor allows you to use an internal system partner Internal System User to define your company to the system Tables may be set up to be used either with a trading partner or with the special system partner Tables that you establish under a specific partner are valid only for that partner Tables that you set up under the internal system user can be used globally The use of partner or system partner tables is defined in the translation objects at design time This allows commonly used items such as names and addresses to be inserted into the outbound data without the need to type it It also allows you to use Lookup and Cross reference tables to supplement or convert data that you either enter or receive You can create cross reference and lookup tables in Gentran Server or you can import and export existing tables to and
280. ple You contact a partner about an overdue document and the partner verifies that it was received but they did not send an acknowledgement Procedure To manually change the status of an interchange group or document to acknowledged complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Interchanges System response The system displays the Interchanges Browser Select an unacknowledged interchange group or document that needs to be set to acknowledged Note Unacknowledged documents are marked with one of the following statuses Overdue Waiting Sent OnNet PickedUp NetErr NetWarn From the Document menu select Ack System response The system sets the status of the document to acknowledged Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Contents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 8 1 CHAPTER 8 Using Acknowledgements OVetVI6W o oeste be oe aie et bere ee be 8 2 Defining Inbound Acknowledgement Criteria 8 3 Defining Outbound Acknowledgement Criteria 8 6 Manually Acknowledging Documents 8 10 Special Considerations for EDIFACT Acknowledgements 8 11 Checking for Overdue Acknowledgements 8 12 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview Overview Using Acknowledgements In t
281. ponse The system displays the tracking data for each document it locates that matches the criteria you specified 4 Double click a document to display the associated tracking information Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Sorting Documents Using Documents 4 46 Sorting Documents Procedure To sort documents in any document browser or the Send Queue browser click the appropriate column heading to sort by that values in that column Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Filtering Out Drawer Documents by Status Filtering Out Drawer Documents by Status Introduction When the Out Drawer Browser is active you can use the Filter function to filter the display of documents by status Sorting with Out To filter the document display in the Out Drawer browser complete the following Drawer browser steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select the Out Drawer System response The system displays the Out Drawer Summary dialog box Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Drawer Browser Click Filter System response The system displays the Filter Dialog Box If you want to filter the display of documents in the Out Drawer by the document status you can choose not to
282. priate values Note If you selected the If file Below Exists condition you can use a wildcard to specify the name of the file for which you want the system to check Did you specify conditional execution Ifyes you must also select True or False from the Result list Ifno continue with the next step Notes Ifyou select True you are indicating that the command should only be executed if there are documents in the specific location or if the file is present Ifyou select False you are indicating that the command should be executed only if there are no documents in the specific location or if the specified file does not exist Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Creating Sessions RE 11 11 Step Action 8 Click OK System response The command is saved and you return to the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box 9 Repeat Steps 1 through 8 until you finish adding commands to the session script Notes Ifyou need to resequence the commands in the script use Up and Down Ifyou need to edit a command in the script select that command and click Edit Ifyou need to delete a command from a script select that command and click Delete Saving the session 1 Click Save to save the new session script 2 Click OK to exit the Gentran Server Process
283. propriate command from the View menu To view the content ofa Select View gt Interchanges gt Gentran single selected Data interchange in raw EDI data format Note When viewing raw EDI or External Data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View menu Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Interchanges Viewing Interchanges Step Action 4 To view the translator Select View gt Interchanges gt contd report fora single selected Translator Report interchange To print a selected Print from the File menu interchange or a summary of interchanges To delete a selected Select Document gt Delete interchange and all associated documents Notes Ifyou delete an interchange with a status of Queued you receive a warning that you must remove specified messages from Out Documents and from your trading partner s inbox If you proceed you are warned that if your partner bases processing results on control number sequencing you should modify the transaction group and interchange control numbers Ifyou delete an interchange with a status of Ready to send you are warned that if your partner bases processing results on control number sequencing you should modify the transaction group and interchange control numbers Ifan interchange contain
284. r the Activate Suspend toggle button reads Activate Ifa selected event is activated green indicator the Activate Suspend toggle button reads Suspend Execute Executes the selected event immediately which allows you to manually invoke an unattended session This also enables you to test a new event or an event that failed Notes Executing an event immediately using this button does not replace the next scheduled run of the event When you click this button an informational message box is displayed Ifthe selected event is scheduled to execute within the next 30 minutes you are notified when the event is scheduled to run and prompted to specify whether you want to run it now click OK or cancel the request click Cancel Ifthe selected event is not scheduled to execute within the next 30 minutes you are prompted to either confirm the request to execute it immediately click OK or cancel the request click Cancel Refresh Refreshes the display of the Events tab Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Process Control Overview 11 19 Event Setup The following illustrates the Event Setup dialog box dialog box Event Setup x Description i Session m Cancel Controller GENTRANMACHINET Browse Notification Type Event Help Timed Polled Time Start Until evey minutes
285. r Outbound the system to filter the display of interchanges Note The default display is both inbound and outbound interchanges Warning At least one of the Inbound Outbound check boxes must be selected OK Exits the dialog box saves the selections Cancel Exits the dialog box without saving selections Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Interchanges Using Interchanges Viewing Interchanges Procedure To view interchanges complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Interchanges System response The system displays the Interchanges Browser Note To refresh the display of the Interchanges browser right click the middle pane and select Refresh from the shortcut menu or press F5 Do you want to filter the display of interchanges by status Ifyes see Filtering the Display of Interchanges on page 7 12 Ifno continue with step 3 Note The Filter function enables you to filter the display of interchanges by date partner and direction inbound and outbound Select an interchange Use the following table to determine your next step To view the related Select View gt Interchanges gt Related external data for a single External Data selected interchange Note When viewing raw EDI or External Data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the ap
286. r for Windows User s Guide Specify the original name of the external data file for which to search Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 vex External Data Search Dialog Box Using Archive and Restore 10 32 Part Function External Data Key Specify the external data key for which to search Find Finds the appropriate messages based on the criteria you selected and displays them in the Search Results Dialog Box Cancel Exits the External Data Search dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Search Results Dialog Box D 10 33 Search Results Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Search Results dialog box illustrating the result of a search performed on archived mailbox messages Search Results x fective Name _ Malice _ Message ld Loosion _ Tine Cisated_ _ 2 MRTETTENH MyCollect1 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 04 MRTETTENH MyCollecti E Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 05 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 64 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 06 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 65 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 09 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 66 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 14 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 67 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 16 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 68 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 17 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 69 Outbox 01 06 00 15 15 18 MRTETTENH MyCollectl 71 Dutbox 01 06 00 15 15 25 MRT
287. r s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview Using Partner Profiles Overview Using Partners Introduction You can set up your partner profiles using any of three methods importing copying and creating them yourself The method you use depends on whether you have a partner profile to use as a starting point as shown in the following table Partner profile creation method When to use Import existing profile Use this method if you receive partner profiles from Sterling Commerce or if you have an existing profile from which you can import partner details The profile can be exported from another copy of the Gentran Server system Reference See Importing Partner Profiles on page 3 85 for more information Copy existing profile Use this method when you have an existing profile that you can copy and then enter a unique partner definition and key enveloping information for the copied partner Reference See Copying Partner Profiles on page 3 88 for more information Create a new profile Use this method when you do not have a profile to import or copy Reference See Process of defining a partner profile on page 3 5 for more information Partner A partner profile begins with a partner definition The partner definition contains definition the basic information about that partner that the system needs before you define the rest of the partner profile You need to
288. ranslation object Also see Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 for more information Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Inbound Relationship 3 60 Using Partners Stage Description Select at least one inbound translation object Create and select at least one inbound group to define how the document is received from this partner Note Depending on the standards you are using either the functional group or interchange may be optional See Inbound groups and interchanges on page 3 58 to determine what is optional for the standard you are using Create and select at least one inbound interchange to define how the document is received from this partner Note Depending on the standards you are using either the functional group or interchange may be optional See Inbound groups and interchanges on page 3 58 to determine what is optional for the standard you are using If you are generating functional acknowledgements as a result of receiving documents for an inbound relationship you must set up the corresponding outbound relationship to generate the acknowledgements your partner requests Reference See Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 for more information Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using
289. rchange 1 Select an interchange in the Interchanges Tracking browser 2 Select View from the Commands menu 3 Click the Tracking information option 4 Click OK Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Finding Specific Text in a Document Step Action 1 To display this contd window Do the following Raw Data View of l Select Interchanges from the appropriate an Interchange area of the The Desk 2 Select an interchange from the Interchanges browser 3 Selecting Interchanges from the View menu 4 Selecting Data from the Interchanges cascading menu Raw Data View of l Select a document in the Interchanges a Document browser 2 Select View from the Commands menu 3 Click OK on the View Choice dialog box External Data 1 Select Interchanges from the appropriate View of an area of the The Desk Interchange 2 Select an interchange from the Interchanges browser 3 Select Interchanges from the View menu 4 Select External Data from the Interchanges cascading menu External Data 1 Select a document in the Interchanges View of a browser Document 2 Select View from the Commands menu 3 Select External Data and click OK on the View Choice dialog box 4 From the Edit menu select Find System response The system displays the Find dialog box 5 In the Find what box type the text you wa
290. rchanges Browser Reference See Viewing Interchanges on page 7 10 for more information about using the Interchanges browser Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Contents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 9 1 CHAPTER 9 Using Tracking OSEEVIGWE ectie t eieiei o A eC oS de pu Rc el dt d 9 2 Tracking Inbound Information 0000 00 9 3 Tracking Outbound Information 00 0000 e eae 9 6 Viewing and Printing Data Audit Information 9 9 Viewing and Printing Tracking Information 9 10 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview Overview In this chapter Tracking feature Using Tracking This chapter describes how to use the Gentran Server tracking systems The system writes a Document Tracking record for every significant event that occurs for a document For example a Document Tracking record is written when the document is created when it is modified and when it 1s exported Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Trackin Tracking Inbound Information g g g Tracking Inbound Information Introduction For inbound processing the system may receive an inbound transmission file such as external data through the Process File command within Gentran Server or through a Mailbox message when the ContentType is configured
291. rdue Rejected Indicates that the interchange is waiting to be reconciled with an inbound functional acknowledgement Indicates that the interchange is waiting to be reconciled with an inbound functional acknowledgement but has exceeded the number of hours by which that acknowledgement is deemed late Indicates that the interchange was acknowledged by your partner and there were errors The interchange was rejected by your partner Acknowledged Indicates that the interchange was acknowledged by your partner and there were no errors Acknowledged with Errors Indicates that the interchange was acknowledged by your partner and there were errors It was accepted by your partner in spite of the errors Partially Acknowledged Indicates that the interchange was successfully received by the trading partner and some of the documents within the interchange were accepted or accepted with errors and other documents within the interchange were rejected Document Compliance Status in OK NotOK Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide This code indicates that the documents are fully compliant with the EDI standard and are eligible for further processing This code indicates one of the following The document failed to comply with the EDI standard If this is the cause of the error the errors are indicated on a translator report associated with the document Despite the fact that the document is not fully compliant it is eligible
292. reating an Inbound Relationship Using Partners 3 58 Creating an Inbound Relationship Introduction To correctly receive and process information from a trading partner you must have an appropriate inbound relationship established that defines the parameters needed to receive data files from that partner Each inbound relationship defines which business documents are received from a partner Necessary You must set up several parameters that are used to create an inbound relationship parameters These parameters tell the system the following information The type of data received The criteria the system uses to validate the information it receives The functional groups and interchanges in which you expect to receive the documents Translation Each inbound relationship must have one or more associated inbound translation objects objects These translation objects determine how the received data is processed You need to specify which translation objects are used to define the rules for exporting printing and creating turnaround documents At a minimum one translation object must be available Note If this relationship requires a new translation object you must register that translation object with the system before creating the inbound relationship See Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 for instructions Inbound groups You must define or select an inbound interchange and or inbound functional group and interc
293. reating an outbound EDIFACT Control document the default system behavior is to extract the Sender ID and Receiver ID from the Internal System User partner According to the EDIFACT standard the Sender ID and Receiver ID in the UCI and UCF record of the Control document should contain the values from the Inbound UNB and UNG segment respectively The Gentran Server product CD in the Maps Special directory contains the translation object CntrlBld DLL tpl This map enables you to obtain the Sender ID and Receiver ID from the inbound data file via a user exit that accesses the GentranAutomation DLL The GentranAutomation DLL is automatically registered when you install or upgrade the product This DLL 1s currently only used by the CntrlBld DLL map Note You can either use either functionality The default translation object selected for the Outbound Control Build relationship is the ACKBUILD CONTRL To use the CntrlBld DLL tpl functionality to obtain the Sender ID and Receiver ID complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box 2 Select the Outbound Control Build relationship from the Select a Partner list and click Outbound System response The system displays the Outbound Relationship Dialog Box for that partner 3 On the Outbound Relationship dialog box click Translation System response The system displays t
294. red data file and click Open System response The system immediately invokes the post communications process with the file as if the file was received via a communication session Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Contents Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide 6 1 CHAPTER 6 Using External Data dou MEME rcm 6 2 External Data Summary Viewer 0 002 ee eens 6 3 External Data Filter Dialog Box 0 0 002 cee eee 6 6 Viewing External Data Files llle essen 6 8 Filtering External Data Files esses 6 9 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview Using External Data Overview In this chapter This chapter explains how to use external data with Gentran Server References See the following for more information Restoring Archived Data on page 10 44 Interchanges Browser on page 7 3 External data Gentran Server can track the relationship between an EDI document or interchange and the corresponding external application data For import processing the system makes a persistent copy of the external data at the start of processing For inbound process file and export processing the system again copies the external data file for persistent storage Gentran Server also enables you to archive external data You can specify which external data process file import and export is copied to th
295. relationship In this case you must create a new inbound or outbound relationship for that partner Reference See Creating an Inbound Relationship on page 3 58 and Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 for more information Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Editing and Deleting Partner Definitions Deleting a To delete a partner profile complete the following steps partner profile Step 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor Action System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the appropriate partner from the Select a Partner list Click Delete System response You are prompted to confirm the deletion Warning When you delete a partner relationship the documents and interchanges associated with that partner are also deleted Ifany documents or interchanges exist for a partner you choose to delete you are warned before the actual deletion Click Yes to delete the selected partner profile System response The partner profile and all associated records are deleted Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Import File Select Dialog Box Using Partners Routing Partner Profiles Import File Select Dialog Box Introduction The Import File Select dialog box enables you import a partner into the system
296. relationship defining the credit memo and type INVOICE for the invoice Note This box is only used if you receive translation objects that are defined to use the Application Alias Value Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Part Function Import Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the transaction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required Note You must select a translation object from the Import list if you have created a specific import translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner relationship Import translation objects may not be appropriate for an Inbound Relationship Data Entry Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the transaction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required Note You must select a translation object from the Data Entry list if you have created a specific data entry trans
297. rform the function listed in this table Note You can use the Reset function to return to their previous location documents that are displayed in the Processing browser but for which processing has terminated This is typically done when the processing of a document terminated improperly Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Finding Specific Text in a Document Using Documents Finding Specific Text in a Document Find function This function enables you to find specified text in the active data view window Using the Find The Find function is available when a data view is the active window The function following are the data view windows Audit Log Document Tracking Interchange Tracking Raw Data View of an Interchange Raw Data View of a Document External Data View of an Interchange External Data View of a Document Procedure To find specific text complete the following steps Step Action 1 Access one of the following data view windows Note menu When viewing raw input or external data you can switch from Text to Hex format by selecting the appropriate command from the View To display this window Do the following Audit Log Select Audit Log from the View menu Document 1 Select a document in a browser Tracking 2 Select View from the Commands menu 3 Click the Tracking information option 4 Click OK Inte
298. rofiles 0 ccc cece eee eee ee ences 3 78 Import File Select Dialog Box 002 0200 200 3 78 Export File Build Dialog Box 002 0000 205 3 79 Partner Copy Dialog Box 00 00 cece eee ees 3 81 Importing Partner Profiles llle eese 3 85 Exporting Partner Profiles cee eee eee ee 3 87 Copying Partner Profiles eese 3 88 Using Partner Tables cc cece cece cece rere reece eee nnn 3 92 DB OVEIVICW lese er ee RBUPULRERTPOPRETRS bake Or RC 3 92 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Using Partners Partner Tables Dialog Box 0 000 c cece ee 3 93 New Table Dialog Box 0 cece eee 3 94 CrossRef Select Dialog Box llllleslelses esee 3 95 CrossRef Entry Dialog Box llsleseeeee eese 3 96 Lookup Select Dialog Box n nnn nnnnnn anana 3 97 Lookup Entry Dialog Box 00 0 cece eee eee 3 98 Table Export File Build Dialog Box 4 3 99 Table Import File Select Dialog Box 204 3 101 Creating Partner Tables 0 0 0 0 e eee eee 3 103 Editing Partner Tables 0 0 0 cece eee ee 3 105 Deleting Entries in a Partner Table 0 4 3 106 Deleting Partner Tables esses leen 3 107 Exporting Partner Tables eese ee eee 3 108 Imp
299. rom the Acknowledge list Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Interchange Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Inbound Interchange Entry dialog box Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Outbound relationships define the parameters needed to send an EDI document to a trading partner The Outbound Relationship dialog box controls other subordinate dialogs that allow you to define everything that is necessary to establish the relationship You are required to specify exactly which document the system sends You must also specify which translation objects will be used to define the data entry dialogs import rules or printing requirements In addition you need to define the specific EDI enveloping requirements that you agreed on with your trading partner The following illustrates the Outbound Relationship dialog box with the Advanced options displayed Outbound Relationship PETZONE Eg Relationship Description Outbound Acknowledgment ANSI 3030 Exit Standard 412 Version
300. rs tab System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Calendars tab Do you want to create a new calendar Ifyes click New System response The system displays the New Calendar dialog box If70 select the calendar that you want to edit and continue with Step 6 System response The system displays the calendar in the center of the Calendars tab In the Calendar Name box type the new calendar name using up to 8 alphanumeric characters Click OK to add the new calendar System response The system displays the new calendar in the middle of the Calendars tab Do you want to exclude a specific date from processing Ifyes click that date on the calendar and continue with Step 7 Ifno continue with Step 7 Note The system displays a mark for that date on the calendar to signify that it is excluded from processing Click Previous or Next to access the preceding or succeeding calendar months in the calendar Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 D Creating and Editing Calendars Using Process Control 11 42 Step Action Do you want to exclude a specific day or days of the week Ifyes select the check box in the Exclude section for each day of the week that you want to exclude from processing and continue with Step 8 Ifno continue with Step 8 Notes You
301. rt Function Save Begins the table export process Cancel Exits the dialog box without making a selection Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Table Import File Select Dialog Box mn 3 101 Table Import File Select Dialog Box Introduction The Table Import function allows you to import partner cross reference and lookup tables from a sequential file This allows you to import tables created for another partner profile share tables with other users of Gentran Server and build tables outside of Gentran Server by formatting your data in the export file layout Notes You can only import Gentran Server partner tables The default file extension for cross reference tables is xrf The default file extension for lookup tables is lkp Diagram The following illustrates the Table Import File Select dialog box Table Import File Select 21 xi Look in 3 Partners f c p File name wif Files of type Cross Reference Files xrf Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Table Import File Select dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Look in Select the folder where you want the system to look for the file Displays the current folder File name Specify the name of the file to be imported Files of type Select the type
302. rted date and time the archive ended number of items archived number of items deleted if any Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Archive Manager 10 6 Using Archive and Restore IF you select the THEN you can view interchange summary information including the following partner profile ID direction date and time interchange control number data audit tracking information group summary information including the following group control number functional group ID group control key document summary information including the following transaction ID transaction control number document name data audit tracking information mailbox N A Inbox Outbox N A message summary information including the following series ID message ID source ID content type sender ID recipient ID sender name recipient name sender mailbox E mail recipient mailbox E mail subject status time message created data audits Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Archive Manager IF you select the THEN you can view attachment summary information including the following attachment ID content type filename
303. s Controllers Primary system controller Secondary controllers User interface clients Introducing Gentran Server for Windows There are two types of controllers in the Gentran Server system A single primary system controller One or more secondary controllers if required The primary system controller controls the management and dispatching of processing requests within the system manages the audit functionality and controls all other system components If you purchased a distributed license you can deploy additional controllers secondary controllers across the Windows network to allow the processing load to be distributed for fast and efficient throughput The secondary controller can be either or both of the following Process controller The process controllers provide similar functions to the primary system controller They are controlled by the primary system controller and are used to distribute processes across multiple machines in a Windows network Communication controller The communication controllers regulate communication between Gentran Server and the organizations value added networks VANS or trading partners with whom data is exchanged The communication controllers can support leased or dialed connections as well as interaction with third party communication packages using the file interface capability A communication controller is installed via a communications gateway The user interface
304. s MEO ol saa nig RITMMT 2 2 EDI Translation Object Browser lssssseeeeeee s 2 3 Register Translation Object Dialog Box 00 eee eese 2 6 Registering New Translation Objects 2 0 cece eee eee 2 7 Deleting Translation Objects 00 00 cece eee een ens 2 8 Chapter 3 Using Partners Introduction set cod erecode Hed Mega eda Roa Heda eg eed ende dudes 3 3 Using Partner Profiles sco snes ew akin tesa da ane ae ICR OE do awwe 3 4 MEO TUI MP nee ile re ou ena Gea ed Shae mead face i pak ee hao on Br ae 3 4 Partner Editor Dialog Box 0 cette nen n enn ens 3 6 Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box 0 0s 3 8 Inbound Relationship Dialog Box 0 eee ees 3 10 Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box 0 0 cece 3 15 Inbound Group Select Dialog Box 0 eh 3 23 Inbound Group Entry Dialog Box 0 0 ete enn 3 25 Inbound Interchange Select Dialog Box 0 0 cece eee eee 3 29 Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box 0 cece eee 3 31 Outbound Relationship Dialog Box 0 0 ccc eh 3 35 Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box 00 00 eens 3 40 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Outbound Group Select Dialog Box ananuna nnana naera 3 44 Outbound Group Entry Dialog Box 0 eh 3 45 Outbound Interchange Select
305. s User 5 Guide System Configuration Directories Tab in the Administration Guide System Configuration Imports Tab in the Administration Guide The CommMgr recognizes the ContentType as Application Import and initiates the import of this file The CommMgr stores the external data reference in the ExtData tb and then builds the unattended processing session file with the new GDW_MBImport command to import the data into Gentran Server After the session file is created unattended processing creates the IPC file and writes the external data information that the Translator needs to perform an import The Translator runs the import map stores tracking information in the ExtDataXref tb References See the following for more information Using Process Control chapter 11 in this guide Communications User s Guide Using Database Tables in the Administration Guide Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f EN Tracking Outbound Information Using Tracking Send process After a file has been imported the Gentran Server documents that are created can be sent to a Mailbox according to the following process Stage Description 1 The system creates an associated Mailbox message in the Gentran Application mailbox It sends the message to the partner s mailbox Like the process file and import actions the send action has a
306. s User s Guide 10 1 CHAPTER 10 Using Archive and Restore Contents p Ittoductlols sess d dna eA SOR oe EXER ac A Run qi qc due doa 10 2 Archiving Data ieisos ie re tints SnG n TEESE ESSEE 10 3 EE UG m PPP L E 10 3 Archive Manager 0 eee ees 10 5 Gentran EDI Archive Definition Dialog Box 10 11 Interchange Selection Criteria Dialog Box 10 13 Interchange Search Dialog Box 0 0 00000 10 15 Group Search Dialog Box esses 10 18 Document Search Dialog Box 00 0 0 e eee 10 20 Mailbox Archive Definition Dialog Box 10 22 Mailbox Selection Criteria Dialog Box 10 24 Mailbox Search Dialog Box llslssleslses esee 10 26 External Data Archive Definition Dialog Box 10 28 External Data Selection Criteria Dialog Box 10 30 External Data Search Dialog Box 00005 10 31 Search Results Dialog Box 00 cee eee 10 33 Sort Preferences Dialog Box 00 cece eee ene 10 35 Creating an Archive Definition 0 0005 10 36 Archiving Data 10 38 Viewing Archived Data nauuna anasan eese 10 39 Searching Archived Data 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 10 43 Restoring Archived Data 0 cece cece eee cece eee nnn 10 44 b OVENI We
307. s a document that is waiting for acknowledgement processing acknowledgement generation or reconciliation you cannot delete it until this processing 1s complete To attach an interchange Select Document gt Attach to a partner Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Filtering the Display of Interchanges Using Interchanges Filtering the Display of Interchanges Introduction When the Interchanges browser is active the Filter function enables you to filter the display of interchanges by date partner and direction inbound and outbound Procedure To filter interchanges by partner and or date complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Interchanges System response The system displays the Interchanges Browser 2 From the Commands menu select Filter System response The system displays the Interchange Filter Dialog Box 3 Do you want the system to filter the display of interchanges by date and time Ifyes clear the No Date Time Checking check box and proceed with step 4 Ifno select the No Date Time Checking check box and proceed with step 6 4 Use the Date From slide bar to select the beginning date of the date range from which the system will filter the display of interchanges 5 Do you want the end date for the date range to always be the current system date and time
308. s list allows you to select which command you want to add to the script which enables you to access the parameters for that command displayed below this box in the Action Setup section After you choose a command additional boxes may be displayed in the Command Specification section of the dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating Sessions 11 10 Using Process Control Step Action Complete the boxes in the Command Specification section of the dialog box with the appropriate values Reference See Commands on page 11 6 for more information Do you want to specify a limit in minutes on how long this command should process before the system writes a message to the Audit Log Ifyes select the check box and type the number of minutes in the box Ifno continue with the next step Do you want to apply a condition to the command fyes select a condition from the Condition list Ifno continue with Step 8 Note Each script command can have an associated condition These conditions are evaluated just prior to execution of the command and can be used to control the processing flow of your session After you choose a condition the system displays two additional boxes in the Condition section of the dialog box Complete the boxes in the Condition section of the dialog box with the appro
309. s on the Interchanges browser Status Icon Description OK e green Indicates that the documents are fully compliant with the EDI standard and are eligible for further processing NotOK red Indicates one of the following The document failed to comply with the EDI standard If this is the cause of the error the errors will be indicated on a translator report associated with the document Despite the fact that the document is not fully compliant it is eligible for further processing The received document could not be associated with a specific trading partner If this is the case the partner for the document is listed as Unknown To associate this document and the other documents received in the interchange with a partner attach the documents from the Interchange browser A suitable trading relationship or translation object could not be associated with the document Detailed information concerning what information was used to locate the relationship and or the translation object will be listed in the audit log To correct this problem a valid relationship must be established using the Partner Editor and a valid export print or turn around translation object must be defined for that relationship A major error occurred while processing the interchange functional group or transaction level enveloping structures This error may include header and trailer control numbers that do not match an
310. s process the system prompts you for any additional information it needs by displaying the appropriate Partner Editor dialog box You are prompted with dialog boxes when you would normally be required to provide information about your site This is usually restricted to your EDI identifiers which the system uses to generate outbound EDI envelopes The system continues displaying Partner Editor dialog boxes until it has all the information it needs When the import is complete the system displays the following message Import process completed Please note any warnings or errors Click OK to return to the Import dialog box Click Exit to return to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Exporting Partner Profiles Exporting Partner Profiles Introduction Gentran Server includes a feature that enables you to export existing partner details to a file You can also export your partners to disk to use as a backup of your partner system Note Any tables cross reference lookup or location attached to the partner profile are also exported Reference See the Partner File Layouts appendix in the Administration Guide for more information Procedure To export a partner profile complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The sy
311. s that were successfully delivered to Network a Value Added Network VAN Warning from Network Filters for documents that were delivered to a VAN which detected non critical errors in the data Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Filter Dialog Box Using Documents Part Function Error from Network Filters for documents that were delivered to a VAN which detected critical errors in the data Picked up by Trading Partner Filters for documents that were successfully delivered to a trading partner through a VAN Acknowledged with Filters for documents that were acknowledged by your No Errors partner with no errors Waiting for Filters for documents that are waiting to be reconciled Acknowledgement with an inbound functional acknowledgement Acknowledgements Filters for documents that are waiting to be reconciled Overdue with an inbound functional acknowledgement but have exceeded the number of hours by which the acknowledgement is deemed late Acknowledgements Filters for documents that were acknowledged by your with Errors partner with errors These documents were accepted by your partner in spite of the errors Partially Filters for documents that were partially acknowledged Acknowledged Note If your partner is going to issue partial acknowledgements at the interchange or group le
312. s the Gentran Server data entry tool It allows you to create modify and view documents Note To use the Document Editor you must register the appropriate screen entry translation object with the system and set up a corresponding outbound relationship for the partner Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Accessing the Document Browsers Using Documents 4 4 Document Browsers Accessing the Document Browsers Introduction You can access document browsers in Gentran Server in one of three ways The Desk gives you access to the In Documents In Documents Workspace Out Documents Out Documents Interchanges In Drawer and Out Drawer The Main Toolbar gives you access to the In Documents In Documents Workspace Out Documents Out Documents Interchanges In Drawer Out Drawer and Send Queue The View menu gives you access to the In Documents In Documents Workspace Out Documents Out Documents Interchanges In Drawer Out Drawer and Send Queue Summary dialog Ifyou select the In Documents In Documents Out Documents Out boxes Documents In Drawer or Out Drawer browser from any of the three locations above the system displays the appropriate summary dialog box for that browser The summary dialog box displays the number of each type of document for each partner contained in the appropriate browser This enables you to filter the display of documents in t
313. saction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required You must select a translation object from the Transaction list if you have created a specific Transaction Build translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner relationship Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Translation Object Dialog Box Part Function Acknowledge Select other translation objects associated with the relationship which gives you the capability to change the system behavior at the transaction and document translation level This allows you to use translation objects that are as partner specific as required and or perform as many functions as required You must select a translation object from the Acknowledge list if you have created a specific translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner relationship When the system generates an acknowledgement it writes the acknowledgement to an internal file containing the acknowledgement details and then maps that internal file If you need the system to process acknowledgements differently you should select an additional translation object from the Acknowledge l
314. sent Out Drawer Sent This code indicates that the document was successfully transmitted to the appropriate partner Waiting This code indicates that the document is waiting to be reconciled with an inbound functional acknowledgement Overdue This code indicates that the document is waiting to be reconciled with an inbound functional acknowledgement but has exceeded the number of hours by which that acknowledgement is deemed late Ack d This code indicates that the document was acknowledged by your partner and there were no errors AckErr This code indicates that the document was acknowledged by your partner and there were errors but it was accepted by your partner in spite of the errors Reject This code indicates that the document was acknowledged by your partner and there were errors The document was rejected by your partner Ack This status is only displayed if there were no acknowledgements expected for this document and either the group or the interchange was partially acknowledged If your partner is going to issue partial acknowledgements at the interchange or group level he she should also indicate acceptance or rejection at the transaction level OnNet This code indicates that the document was successfully delivered to a VAN To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 20 report in data format Continued on next page Gentran Server for W
315. source and target message ID associated with the external data However unlike the other actions the external data is a message and it is related to an interchange The links between the interchange that is sent and the Mailbox message to which it is sent are preserved in the ExtDataXref_tb When you want to view this information it is available in the External Data Summary Viewer Example In this scenario the user has selected to send multiple documents in one interchange After the Translator builds the interchange the CommMgr sends the interchange to the Mailbox While the CommMgr is sending the interchange it receives a message ID for the Mailbox to create a message in the Gentran Application mailbox Then it creates an external data reference in the ExtData tb where the type is Message Finally CommMgr has enough information to create a record in the ExtDataXref tb linking the interchange to the message References See the following for more information Sending Document on page 5 6 Communications User s Guide Using Database Tables in the Administration Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Tracking Viewing and Printing Data Audit Information D Viewing and Printing Data Audit Information Introduction Typically you view data audit document tracking information that is available for a single document to get information to
316. space browser Workspace 1 L EX Pate Type k View ETZON 810 OK z PETZONE 1 k Print Delete Erpa Open Post New Import gt Refresh Close 1 Documents 1 selected Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Workspace browser and their functions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box which allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print the selected document Delete Deletes the selected document Export Not a valid function for this browser Open Accesses the Document Editor facility which allows you to edit the selected document Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Workspace Browser Part Function Post Moves the selected compliant document to the Out Documents Browser Note Post documents to the Out Documents before sending them New Accesses the Create New Document dialog box which allows you to select a partner transaction set combination for which you want to enter a new document using the Document Editor facility Note The Document Editor uses the associated screen entry translation object to allow information to be entered into the system Reference See Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 for more information I
317. specified file Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Process Control Overview 11 7 Command Action GDW Audit Purge Deletes all audit records in the system Note The purged Audit Log entries are removed from the database and appended to a text file To ensure that the text file does not grow unchecked you may want to usea File Delete command prior to this command GDW Audit Wrte Writes a processing user audit message to the Audit Log based on the specified parameters GDW Document Purge Removes document records from the Gentran Server database according to the specified age date location and or status GDW Document Rpt Creates a specified file that contains document data as well as group and interchange data if applicable for documents in the Gentran Server database according to the specified status location and or age date GDW Export Performs the Export function and can perform the send mailbox function to enable the output of an inbound translation to be delivered back to the Mailbox Server Manager Note You must have an export translation object registered with the system GDW ExtData Delete Deletes external data references based on the action taken on the external data and or age GDW Import Performs the Import function on a specified file Note You must ha
318. ss Control Step Action Do you want to designate this event as a notification type Ifyes select the check box and continue with Step 2 in Saving the event on page 11 26 Ifno continue with the next step Complete this section if the event is timed In the Time Start box on the Timed tab you must fill in a time Note You must use 24 hour HH MM format If you want to specify a stop time for the event type that time in the Until box on the Timed tab Note You can either use 24 hour HH MM format or 12 hour HH MM or H MM format with the designator a am or p pm Do you want to specify an interval of time after which the event is run Ifyes in the Minutes box on the Timed tab type the number of minutes after which you want the event to be executed and continue with Step 4 Example If you specify 15 minutes the event is executed every 15 minutes from the start time Ifno continue with Step 4 Do you want to use a predefined calendar Ifyes select that calendar from the Calendar list and continue with Step 5 Ifno continue with Step 5 Note A calendar enables you to specify the days in each month that you do not want the selected session to be run If you select a calendar you can also select specific days of the week on which you want this session to run on However if you select a calendar you cannot specify a day in the Date b
319. ss form as defined by the standards Examples include an ANSI 850 purchase order or an UCS 880 invoice The standards define each transaction set in terms of the segments and elements that make up the form the order in which they appear and the relationships among them This is also known as a message in Europe A document into which data elements from the source document have been automatically transferred using a turnaround map A series of instructions that the system uses to create a turnaround document a logical response document to the source from an inbound source document by transferring data from the source document to elements in the target document translation object The Uniform Communications Standard is the standard used by the grocery industry This function enables you to move a document previously posted to the Out Documents back to the Workspace for further processing A formal update of an EDI standard Each standards setting body updates its standards on a regular basis For documents this function enables you to display the raw EDI data a formatted document using a translation object or a translator report depending on the format selected For interchanges this function enables you to display the raw EDI data or a translator report depending on the format selected The Voluntary Inter industry Communication Standards is the standards setting body for the retail industry a subset of ANSI X12 The
320. ss of defining an outbound relationship Stage Description 1 Create a new outbound relationship 2 If you are using the EDIFACT ODETTE or TRADACOMS standard you must complete the envelope header information for this type of document For the ANSI UCS and TDCC standards the envelope information is optional Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Outbound Relationship Using Partners 3 68 Stage Description Create and register the inbound translation object to be used with this relationship Reference See the Application Integration User s Guide for more information about creating a translation object Also see Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 for more information Select at least one outbound translation object Create and select at least one outbound group including enveloping information to define how the document is received from this partner Note Depending on the standards you are using either the functional group or interchange may be optional See Outbound groups and interchanges on page 3 66 to determine what is optional for the standard you are using Create and select at least one outbound interchange including enveloping information to define how the document is received from this partner Note Depending on the standards you are using either the functional group or interchange may be
321. ss the event is suspended Reference See Procedure suspending an event on page 11 37 for more information Procedure To edit an existing event complete the following steps Step Action Editing an event Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Click the Events tab to display the event options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Events tab Select the event that you want to modify and click Edit System response The system displays the Event Setup dialog box If you want to modify the description of the event type the new description in the Description box If you want to select another session to be executed do so from the Session list If you want to change the controller on which you want this event to be run type the machine name in the Controller box Do you want to designate this event as a notification type Ifyes select the check box and continue with Step 2 in Saving the event on page 11 30 Ifno continue with the next step Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Editing Events 11 28 Using Process Control Step Action Complete this section if the event is timed In the Time Start box on the Timed tab type a time Note You can eit
322. st complete this box If you do not complete this box the system uses the value from the copied partner profile s envelope information The Recipient Name is mandatory if you do not complete the Recipient Code box Receiver DUNS44 Specify the DUNS number of your partner Note This value is mandatory Save Saves the modified information Clear Clears the information from the dialog box Exit Exits the Partner Copy dialog box Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Importing Partner Profiles Importing Partner Profiles Introduction Before you begin Procedure The partner profile defines the parameters that control the processing and structure of inbound and outbound data As a result the partner profiles may become complex and may require you to define a significant number of parameters To simplify this process Gentran Server includes the import partner feature which enables you to import partner details from a file The file of partner details can originate from a partner profile that was exported from another copy of the Gentran Server system You can also use the import facility to update information for existing partners If you import to an existing partner profile you can add new trading relationships Existing relationships are not modified Note Any tables cr
323. start and end offset indicators in the transmission file for the given interchange Commpost invokes the Translator for each interchange to finish processing the data and writes the entry in the ExtDataXref tb to link the external data reference to the Gentran data References See the following for more information Using Process Control chapter 11 in this guide Communications User s Guide Using Database Tables appendix in the Administration Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Tracking Tracking Inbound Information Export process Data that is exported is already in the system so the external data that creates the export file is the Translator Therefore the Translator stores the tracking information in the database Stage Description 1 The Translator uses the document or documents as input to the export translation object 2 Depending on the specifications of the translation object the system generates an export file 3 The Translator copies the newly generated export file to the External Data folder in the system data store updates the ExtData_tb with the appropriate information and updates the ExtDataXref_tb with the external data and associated document information References See the following for more information Exporting Documents on page 4 59 Using Database Tables appendix in the Adm
324. stem displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select a partner Click Export System response The system displays the Export File Build Dialog Box Name the export file by doing the following Navigate to the correct folder using the Look in list Type the name in the File name box Note The system automatically prompts you to name the export file with the name of the partner and the par extension Click Save to export the partner Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Copying Partner Profiles Using Partners 3 88 Copying Partner Profiles Introduction Procedure The partner copy function enables you to copy partner information so you do not have to type in similar partner profiles from scratch Instead you can copy from an existing profile and enter unique partner definition and key enveloping information for the copied partner The partner copy function provides a quick method for establishing partners that have similar or identical trading relationships Note You must export the partner profile before you copy it If you do not know which EDI standard that partner profile uses check the profile to obtain that information before you export and copy it Reference See Exporting Partner Profiles on page 3 87 for more information To copy a partner profile complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the To
325. t ID Select the acknowledgement you want generated for this interchange Example ANSI X12 997 Functional Acknowledgement UCS EDIA 999 Acceptance Rejection Advice EDIFACT CNTRL Interchange Transl Obj Select a partner specific Interchange Break Map translation object if this trading partner interchange deviates from the normal system behavior You must select a translation object from this list if you want the system to perform partner specific interchanging Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Interchange Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 E Inbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box 3 34 Using Partners Part Function Acknowledge Transl Obj Select an Acknowledgement Break Map if one exists on the system You must select a translation object from the Acknowledge Transl Obj list if you have created a specific translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner interchange When the system reconciles an acknowledgement it maps the acknowledgement to an internal file and then processes it If you need the system to process acknowledgements differently you should select an additional translation object f
326. t Indicate whether the event should be executed if the result is True or False Note Ifyou select True you are indicating that the event should be executed only when the specified file is present Ifyou select False you are indicating that the event should be executed only when the specified file does not exist Process Control The following illustrates the Active Events tab of the Process Control dialog box dialog box Active Events t ab Active Events Events Calendars Sessions EA HE Gentran Server Process Control Event EventID Controle Session Command Parmi Parm2 Parm3 Refresh Events fio seconds Refresh Actions p seconds M Auto Refresh OK Cancel Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview 11 22 Active Events tab parts and functions and their functions Using Process Control The following lists the parts of the Process Control dialog box Active Events tab Part Function Event list Displays the events that are currently processing Session list Lists each command and the associated parameters for the session script for the event that 1s currently processing Note A green arrow indicates which command the system Is currently processing Refresh Events seconds Specify the default interval 10 seconds for refreshing the Active Events list Valid valu
327. t Mailbox and E mail Address Ifyes continue with step 9 Ifno continue with the next step Select the appropriate mailbox from the Default Mailbox list OR Click New Mailbox to create a new mailbox Note See the Communications User s Guide for more information about creating mailboxes Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Creating an Outbound Relationship Step Action Click Envelope to set up the parameters for the generation of the interchange segment System response The Outbound Interchange dialog box displayed is one of the following depending on the standard you selected on the Outbound Relationship dialog box Outbound ISA Envelope Outbound ICS Envelope Outbound BG Envelope Outbound UNB Envelope Outbound UNA Envelope Outbound STX Envelope Outbound Envelope PIP Initiation After you set up the required parameters in the enveloping dialog box click Save to store the information and return to the Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box Click Save to store the information about the Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box and return to the Outbound Interchange Select dialog box Highlight the new interchange Click Select System response Selects the interchange and returns to the Outbound Relationship dialog box Finalizing the ou
328. t failed due to an error during the communications process This code indicates that the document is fully compliant with the EDI standard Documents with this status can be posted to Out Documents and sent This code indicates that the document does not comply with the EDI standard definition You can determine the errors that are causing the compliance failure by viewing the translator report for the document status bar The status bar of an application window defines information about a selection command or process defines Menu Bar items as the user highlights each item and indicates any current keyboard initiated modes for typing such as CAP for the Caps Lock key or NUM for the Num Lock key Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 16 synchronous TDCC translation object third party network title bar toolbar track TRADACOMS A mode of coordination of communication among distributed processes that requires request reply pairs to occur within the bounds of a specified time interval in which the communication session is live See EDIA A predesigned layout set up to ensure that input or output for a particular transaction set exists and is presented in a usable fashion You must specify which translation objects are used by each partner relationship Inbound Translation Objects Turn Around This translation object is used when a document is
329. t or production mode The default value is Production Acknowledgement Specify if acknowledgement reconciliation will occur Processing during the inbound break session Immediate or during its scheduled interval Deferred The default is Immediate Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Inbound Relationship dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Inbound Relationship Dialog Box 3 14 Using Partners Part Function New Accesses the New Inbound Relationship dialog box which allows you to create a new relationship Delete Removes the specified inbound relationship from the system Translation Accesses the Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Advanced Toggles the display of the advanced options Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Introduction The Inbound Translation Objects dialog box is used to specify which translation objects will be used to process the data defined by this relationship The following lists the inbound translation levels from the lowest level up Translation Level Description Document Validate the document against the specified translation
330. t several documents that are not adjacent to each other in the Out Documents list press CTRL and click the documents Click Send System response The system displays the Gentran Server for Windows dialog box Click Yes to start the transmission session Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Communications Sending All Documents Sending All Documents Introduction You can send all documents in the Out Documents by two different methods Select the Transmit icon on The Desk Access the Out Drawer browser and click Send Procedure To send all documents complete the following steps Method 1 Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Transmit System response The system displays the Gentran Server for Windows dialog box 2 Click Yes to start the transmission session System response The system displays the Communications Session Dialog Box 3 Select one or more mailboxes for which you want to send data Click OK to start a communication session to send data click Cancel if you want to cancel the transmission session Note This action sends all documents currently located in the Out Documents for which the partner is using one of the selected mailboxes If there are no documents in the Out Documents or interchanges with a Ready status in the Interchanges browser a receive only session is perfor
331. t to be run the Gentran Scheduler service initiates the processing of the event If the event is running as polled you can specify a file name and whether the event should run if the file exists or not The Gentran Poller service polls the process controller Ifyou specified that the file must exist the Gentran Poller initiates the processing of the event when the file appears Ifyou specified that the file must not exist the Gentran Poller initiates the processing of the event when the file no longer exists on the controller To create a new event complete the following steps Step Action Creating a new event 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box 2 Click the Events tab to display the event options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Events tab 3 Click New System response The system displays the Event Setup dialog box so you can create a new event entry 4 In the Description box type a description of the event 5 From the Session list select the session that you want to be executed 6 In the Controller box type or select the machine name of the controller on which you want this event to be run Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating New Events 11 24 Using Proce
332. table Export Accesses the Table Export File Build Dialog Box which enables you to export a partner table Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 New Table Dialog Box 3 94 New Table Dialog Box Using Partners Introduction The New Table dialog box enables you to create a cross reference or lookup table Diagram The following illustrates the New Table dialog box New Table x Table Name m r Table Type Cross Reference Lookup Exit Help i Parts and The following lists the parts of the New Tables dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Table Name Specify the name of the table Note The table name must be the same as the name used in the translation object that requires the table If your database is case sensitive when you reference the table using standard or extended rules you must type the exact name of the table including case Reference See the Application Integration User 5 Guide for more information about standard and extended rules Table Type Specify the type of table Valid values Cross Reference Used to convert your values to your trading partner s values during outbound processing and to convert your trading partner s values to your values during inbound processing Lookup Used to find values in inbound or outbound data
333. tbound relationship On the Outbound Relationship dialog box click Save to save the outbound relationship Click Exit to return to the Partner Editor dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Editing and Deleting Partner Definitions Using Partners 3 76 Editing and Deleting Partner Definitions Introduction The partner definition contains the basic partner profile information to which the system associates the rest of that partner s records You can edit nd delete the partner definition from the Partner Editor dialog box Editing a partner To edit a partner profile complete the following steps profile Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the appropriate partner from the Select a Partner list Click Edit System response The system displays the Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box for that partner Make the necessary changes Click Save System response The system returns to the Partner Editor dialog box Note You can also edit other aspects of a partner relationship such as inbound relationship or outbound relationship by clicking the appropriate button Inbound or Outbound on the Partner Editor dialog box You are not able to edit any boxes that are grayed these are the keys to the
334. te an acknowledgement it merely changes the status of the outbound document The status of a document in the Out Drawer browser may need to be manually set to Acknowledged for many reasons Example You have contacted a partner about an overdue document and that partner verified that it was received but they are not sending you an acknowledgement Reference See Manually Acknowledging an Interchange Group or Document on page 7 20 for more information Procedure To manually change the status of a document to Acknowledged complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Out Drawer System response The Out Drawer Summary dialog box is displayed 2 Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the Out Drawer Browser 3 Select an Unacknowledged document that needs to be set to Ack d acknowledged Note Unacknowledged documents are marked with one of these states Overdue Waiting Sent OnNet PickedUp NetErr NetWarn 4 Click Ack System response The system sets the status of the document to Ack d Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Acknowledgements Special Considerations for EDIFACT Acknowledgements Special Considerations for EDIFACT Acknowledgements Introduction Procedure When c
335. ted If the condition is false the command is skipped and processing continues with the next defined command Process Control The following illustrates the Sessions tab of the Process Control dialog box dialog box Sessions tab HR Gentran Server Process Control Active Events Events Calendars Sessions Session System AuditPurge New Command Parm Parm2 Parm3 Parm4 Save GDW_Audit_Purge 3 WATETTE End Script Save As System AuditPurge test 4 gt Ins Edit Delete Up Down Barcel Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Overview her Sessions tab parts and functions Using Process Control The following lists the parts of the Process Control dialog box Session tab and their functions Part Function list Displays all currently defined session scripts Session Displays the script of the currently selected session Ins Accesses the Action Setup dialog box so you can insert a script command above the current line Edit Accesses the Action Setup dialog box so you can modify the selected script command Delete Deletes the selected script command Up Moves the selected command up one line in the script Down Moves the selected command down one line in the script New Accesses the New Session dialog box so you can create a new session Save Sav
336. tes a receive only session and the In Documents Browser and In Documents Browser are updated with any data received To start a receive only session complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the View menu select In Documents System response The system displays the In Documents Summary dialog box 2 Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System response The system displays the In Documents Browser Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Receiving Documents 5 12 Using Communications Step Action Click Receive System response The system displays the Communications Session Dialog Box Select one or more mailboxes for which you want to send data Click OK to start a communication session to send data Note This action initiates a communications session and updates the In Documents Browser and In Documents Browser with any data received as a result of that session Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Communications Viewing the Send Queue Viewing the Send Queue Introduction The Send Queue browser displays a list of the documents that are currently queued to be sent and enables you to perform document based tasks similar to those available in the main system browsers Note
337. tet 01 25 00 01 16 51 PM 2 E GENSRYNTSTutorial Pettest int 01 25 00 01 17 31 PM j 000000004 PETZONE Received Not Required 01 25 0001173 ccosssssssssososis 19 is 3 OUTTIOS amp INT 01 25 00 01 19 40 PM A 000000001 PETZONE Sent Not Required 01 25 00 01 19 36 PM S E 4 E GENSRYNTSTutorial Pet_810 txt 01 25 00 02 09 00 PM IG 950510 5555555555 950512 4 FSB0001 PETZONE 810 FAReceived 5555555555 1 5 OUTTTI amp INT 02 04 00 05 17 08 PM ed 000000001 PETZONE Sent NotRequired 02 04 00 05 17 03 PM B E GENSRYNTTutorial Pet_810 txt 02 04 00 05 23 35 PM 7 E GENSRYNTTutorial Pettest int 02 04 00 05 23 59 PM el 000000004 PETZONE Received NotRequired 02 04 00 05 24 0 RPETTEST Z0023030810 P 31111111XXXXXX5555555555 PETZONE OutBounc Interchange Control 0000000tC roup Control 1 ocument Control 0001 m 2 Z Parts and The following lists the parts of the External Data Summary Viewer and their functions functions Part Function Status bar Displays the filer specifications from the External Data Filter Dialog Box left pane Displays a list of all external data files and if available an external tree associated EDI document or interchange that was sent or received Reference See the following for more information Information organization on page 6 3 Icons on page 6 5 upper right Displays the data file used in translation if this option is pane Extern
338. the THEN perform this action archive file information select the archive file displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane interchange information select the interchange displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Viewing Archived Data 10 40 Using Archive and Restore Step Action 5 contd interchange data audit displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane right click the interchange and select View Data Audits from the shortcut menu interchange tracking information displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane right click the interchange and select View Tracking Info from the shortcut menu interchange file displayed in an external viewer right click the interchange and select View Data External Viewer from the shortcut menu interchange file displayed in the Archive Manager lower right pane right click the interchange and select View Data Screen from the shortcut menu group information displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane select the group document information displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane select the document document data audit displayed in the Archive Manager upper right pane right click the document and select View
339. thin Interchanges Introduction You can view the individual documents in an interchange as long as a screen entry translation object for each document is available on your system Procedure Use this procedure to view the documents within an interchange Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Interchanges System response The system displays the Interchanges Browser Notes The Interchanges browser displays all interchanges group and documents that were sent or received Torefresh the display ofthe Interchanges browser right click the middle pane and select Refresh from the shortcut menu or press F5 2 Select a document and proceed with the next step or double click a document to view it Note You must have a screen entry translation object for this document available on your system Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Interchanges Viewing Documents within Interchanges Step Action With a document selected use the following table to determine your next step To view a translator report of the actions the translator took on this document Select View gt Interchanges gt Translator Report To view the content of a single selected interchange in raw EDI data format Select View gt Interchanges gt Gentran Data Note When viewing raw EDI
340. ting the appropriate command from the View menu The View function can be accessed using either of the following methods A document browser is active and a single document is selected The Interchanges or Restored Interchanges browser is active and a single document within an interchange is selected Reference See Viewing Documents within Interchanges on page 7 14 for information about the Interchanges browser To view a document from a document browser complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select one of the document browsers System Response The system displays the appropriate summary dialog box for that browser Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Viewing Documents Step Action Select the type of document for the appropriate partner and click View System Response The system displays the browser containing those documents Select a single document from the appropriate browser Click View System Response The system displays the View Choice Dialog Box Select an option to display the input data To display raw EDI data select Gentran Data Todisplay the data file used in translation select External Data Note This option is not available if the external data file used in translation does not exist To d
341. tners Importing Partner Tables 3 111 Importing Partner Tables Introduction The Table Import function allows you to import partner cross reference and lookup tables from a sequential file This allows you to import tables created for another partner profile and build tables outside of Gentran Server by formatting your data in the export file layout Reference See the Partner File Layouts appendix in the Administration Guide for more information Procedure To import a partner table complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Tools menu select Partner Editor System Response The system displays the Partner Editor Dialog Box Select the partner profile or the system partner Internal System User for which you want to import a Cross reference or Lookup table Click Tables System Response The system displays the Partner Tables Dialog Box Click Import System response The system displays the Table Import File Select Dialog Box From the Look in drop down list select the location of the table file Type the import file name in the File name box OR Select it from the list Notes You can only import Gentran Server partner tables The default file extension for cross reference tables is xrf The default file extension for lookup tables is Ikp Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows
342. to Application EDI After the file is received by the system you may either export the file or configure the system to export it automatically Process file When data arrives directly into the system through a Process File command process Commpost performs the following actions to save the information pertaining to this file Stage Description 1 If System Configuration is configured to copy process file data Commpost copies the file to the External Data directory 2 Commpost updates the ExtData_tb with a new record containing the type of external data being saved such as ExtData a new external data key after allocating a new one and other relevant data pertaining to this external data reference 3 Commpost splits this file into interchanges and creates INT files interchanges and IPC files for the Translator 4 Commpost invokes the Translator which continues with the inbound process and creates a record in ExtDataXref_tb linking the external data reference to the interchange just created There is one IPC file for each interchange and the IPC file passes information to the Translator including the starting and ending offset indicators in the transmission file for the interchange to which it corresponds and the external data type and key This ensures that the system can reference this file external data in the event you want to view tracking information or external data Note If you do not
343. tran system These components can be deployed on a single machine or over a number of machines depending on your needs Typical system Typically your system initially consists of a small number of machines operating as Gentran Server user interface clients and a larger more powerful machine operating as a combined primary system controller communication controller process controller After you complete the necessary translation objects for your installation using Application Integration you can add other process controllers and communication controllers as required to distribute the processing workload Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Getting Started Introducing Gentran Server for Windows Logical System component interaction diagram components contd Gentran Server system Multiple Controllers Primary Gentran System Controller The following diagram illustrated the interaction of the logical components of the Installed Components W Process Controller default E Client Access Components E Integration Components System Data Store pe D atabase Gentran Server Windows 2003 Enterprise Edition Secondary Controller 1 User Interface User Interface Secondary Controller 2 Client Client p Gentran Gentran Gentran
344. translation object will be listed in the audit log To correct this problem a valid relationship must be established using the Partner Editor and a valid export print or turn around translation object must be defined for that relationship A major error occurred while processing the interchange functional group or transaction level enveloping structures This error may include header and trailer control numbers that do not match an invalid trailer control count or a control number sequence checking error If any of these errors occur they will be listed on the translator report for the interchange containing the document Duplicate yellow Indicates the document has the same name as another document on the system Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Archive and Restore Viewing Restored Interchanges 10 51 Viewing Restored Interchanges Procedure To view restored interchanges complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Restored Interchanges System response The system displays the Restored Interchanges Browser Note To refresh the display of the Interchanges browser right click the middle pane and select Refresh from the shortcut menu or press F5 Do you want to filter the display of interchanges by status Ifyes see Filtering the Display of Restored Inter
345. trol Integration 5 A In Documents Drawer Sand ur Te E sala ea e eel a x o e e sm In Documents Out Documents External Processing Close Mailbox System In Drawer Dala Audit Active Trading Fen Confusion Interchanges Document Log Window Partners Application Search Integration Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Navigating in Gentran Server Getting Started 1 8 Browser toolbar The Browser Toolbar gives you access to the functions that are available from browsers in Gentran Server Unavailable items are dimmed The Browser Toolbar is a dockable toolbar so you can affix it to any edge of the EC Manager window The following illustrates the Browser Toolbar View External Data Post Delete View Copy Document Translator Report Sort Filter Acknowledge MAAL zi A Respond mad O Text Interchange pen Print Move to Attach View Status In Drawer Gentran Data The Desk The Desk is a graphic representation of the Gentran Server components and document locations It provides a quick and easy way to access some of the most commonly used browsers functions and subsystems of Gentran Server You can click the appropriate part of The Desk any time you need to access a browser function or subsystem represented on The Desk Some of the browser icons display a graphic representation of paper if the docum
346. try Dialog Box 3 48 Using Partners Part Function Format Select the format of the transaction set control number that will be generated Normal The number will be generated by incrementing the last used control number The length of the number will be defined by the standard 6 3 The number will be a composite of two numbers The first six digits are the last six digits of the functional group control number The last three digits are a counter beginning at 1 within the functional group Use this format only as instructed by your trading partner 5 4 The number will be a composite of two numbers The first five digits are the last five digits of the functional group control number The last four digits are a counter beginning at 1 within the functional group This is the normal TDCC numbering convention It is used by the Motor Rail and Ocean transportation industries 5 3 The number will be a composite of two numbers The first five digits are the last five digits of the functional group control number The last three digits are a counter beginning at 1 within the functional group This is the normal UCS convention which is used by the Grocery and Warehousing industries Note This box is disabled if Sequence From Group is not checked Group Transl Obj Select a partner specific Group Build Map translation object if this trading partner group deviates from the normal system behav
347. ts ese kr orc etm aram on Un a Vins e we Rn ew 4 51 Moving Documents to the In Drawer 0 4 4 51 Copying a Document to Reprocess and Resend 4 52 Posting Documents lsleleeseleeee ees 4 53 UnPosting Documents 0 0 00 cee eens 4 54 Responding to Documents 00 0 0 cece eee eee 4 55 Importing Documents 00 0 cee eee eee 4 57 Exporting Documents 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 4 59 Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Introduction In this chapter EDI documents Document Editor Introduction This chapter explains how to use the Gentran Server document functions including creating and editing documents managing documents routing documents Gentran Server tracks the relationship between an EDI document and the corresponding application data For import processing the system makes a persistent copy of the application data at the start of processing For inbound export processing the system assigns a unique identifier to the document which Is then permeated throughout the system for all database entries associated with the received document References For additional information see the following Importing Documents on page 4 57 Exporting Documents on page 4 59 Using Tracking chapter 9 in this guide The Document Editor feature i
348. tting up a partner location you must know the following information to plan the implementation of this partner The unique name that identifies this partner location At least one reference code to identify the location Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 ES Location Select Dialog Box Using Partners 3 114 Location Select Dialog Box Introduction The Location Select dialog box allows you to add edit and delete partner specific name and address information Locations are only used with translation objects that are designed to incorporate that data Diagram The following illustrates the Location Select dialog box Locations Exit Edit Delete Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Location Select dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Locations Displays all defined locations Exit Exits the Location Select dialog box New Accesses the Location Entry Dialog Box which allows you to create a new location Edit Accesses the Location Entry Dialog Box which allows you to edit the selected location Delete Removes the selected location from the system Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Location Entry Dialog Box 3 115 Location Entry Dialog Box Introduction The Location Entry dialog box enab
349. unction Archives menu Contains the following options Restore data Mark data for restoration single item or all items Unmark data single item or all items Refresh archive level View data audits at the interchange document message or external data level View data audits and data at the interchange document attachment or external data level Delete archive files Search for specific archived data Select how you want the Archive data sorted Definitions menu Contains the following options Create new archive definition Edit or delete archive definition Archive data Help menu Access Archive Help and information about the Archive Manager Create new archive definition fis Archive data IA Mark selected item to be restored to the system f Restore marked data to the system Left pane Archive view and restore data Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Archive Manager 10 10 Using Archive and Restore Part Function Upper right pane Lower right pane The display depends on the level and type of the selection but may contain any one of the following file information start end number of items archived and if any items were deleted interchange information gt group informati
350. unctions functions Part Function View Accesses the View Choice Dialog Box which allows you view the selected document Print Accesses the Print Choice Dialog Box which allows you to print the selected document Delete Deletes the selected document Export Accesses the Select Export Method Dialog Box which allows you to export the selected document Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents In Drawer Browser Part Function Respond Creates a turnaround document in response to the selected document or documents Note The Respond function is only valid when one or more documents are selected and Turn Around translation objects exist for the selected documents Reference See Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box on page 3 15 for more information Refresh Refreshes the display of the browser Close Closes the browser Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Workspace Browser Using Documents 4 12 Workspace Browser Introduction The Workspace browser contains a list of documents that the system received but that have not yet been processed by the user After the documents are processed printed or exported the documents are transferred to the In Drawer Diagram The following illustrates the Work
351. until processing has terminated Click OK System response The system exits the Gentran Server Process Control dialog box Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Executing an Event Immediately 11 38 Using Process Control Executing an Event Immediately Introduction The Events tab of the Gentran Server Process Control dialog enables you to execute the selected event immediately This function allows you to manually invoke an unattended session and also enables you to test a new event or an event that failed Procedure To execute an event immediately complete the following steps Step Action 1 Click Process Control on The Desk System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Active Events tab 2 Click the Events tab to display the event options System response The system displays the Process Control dialog box Events tab 3 Select the suspended event that you want to execute immediately and click Execute System response Use this table to determine the system response IF the system displays this message THEN you should This event is scheduled to Click OK to run the event execute next at lt scheduled immediately time gt Do you want to run it OR now anyway Click Cancel to cancel the Runce Russ request the event will execute at its scheduled time immediately 4 Click OK System respo
352. ur archives sorted in Date Time the display Filename OK Implements the selected sort order and exits the dialog box Cancels Exits the dialog box without changing the sort order Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Creating an Archive Definition Using Archive and Restore 10 36 Creating an Archive Definition Procedure To create an archive definition file complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Archive System response The system displays the Archive Manager Expand the Archive tree Note This is necessary to create a new archive definition Right click Definitions under Gentran EDI Mailbox or External Data and select New from the shortcut menu to define archive parameters System response The system displays the Gentran EDI Archive Definition Dialog Box the Mailbox Archive Definition Dialog Box or the External Data Archive Definition Dialog Box In the Name box type the name of the archive definition Do you want the system to remove the data from the Gentran Server system after archiving it Ifyes select the Delete Data After Archive check box and continue with the next step Ifno continue with the next step Click Add System response The system displays the appropriate Selection Criteria dialog box Continued on next page
353. uring outbound import processing to select the correct partner 10 Select the appropriate mailbox from the Default Mailbox list Note See the Communications User s Guide for more information 11 Complete the appropriate boxes in the enveloping section of the dialog box Note You should only complete those boxes that are necessary for the standard the copied partner profile uses The standards are listed to the right of each box Ifthe partner profile you copied uses a standard you must complete all the necessary enveloping boxes for that standard If you do riot complete the necessary boxes for the standard the system takes the necessary information from the copied partner profile envelope Example If the copied partner profile uses the UCS standard you must complete the Interchange Communication ID box among others 12 After you enter all the partner information click Save System response The system displays the Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Partners Copying Partner Profiles Step Action 13 Do you need to change the default mailbox fyes select the appropriate mailbox from the Default Mailbox list Or click New Mailbox to create a new mailbox Then click Save Ifno click Save System response The system completes the partner copy o
354. ve an import translation object registered with the system GDW Partner Delete Executes the partner delete command GDW Partner Import Executes the partner import command GDW Partner Export Executes the partner export command Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Overview 11 8 Using Process Control Command Action GDW Print Performs the Print function Note You must have a print translation object registered with the system GDW Process File GDW Receive Invokes the post communications process with any EDI file as if the file was received via a communication session Note You must have an export translation object registered with the system Performs the Receive Only function GDW Send Performs an automated send for all partners and mailboxes that have documents posted to be sent unless you specify a particular partner mailbox and transaction combination GDW Send Receive Performs the Send Receive function This function does not wait for previously executed Send Receive sessions to finish it executes the Send Receive when you specify Terminate Script Terminates the script Conditions The following lists the script conditions and their actions IF the condition is If File Below Exists THEN it indicates that the system must lo
355. vel they should also indicate acceptance or rejection at the transaction level Acknowledged but Filters for documents that were acknowledged by your Rejected partner with errors These documents were rejected by your partner Send Failed Filters for documents for which the send transmission failed Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Documents Creating Documents Creating and Editing Documents Creating Documents Introduction To create a document using the Document Editor the system must be set up to support screen entry for the partner transaction set combination you want to enter Note The appropriate Screen Entry translation object must be registered and a corresponding Outbound relationship must be set up for the partner References For additional information see the following Registering New Translation Objects on page 2 7 Creating an Outbound Relationship on page 3 66 Gentran Server Online Help Document Editor Procedure To create a document complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Workspace System Response The system displays the Workspace Browser 2 Click New System response The system displays the Create New Document dialog box Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005
356. ver for Windows November 2005 f j Archiving Data Using Archive and Restore 10 38 Archiving Data Before you begin Before archiving data you must create an archive definition file that contains your selection criteria Reference See Creating an Archive Definition on page 10 36 for more information Procedure To archive data complete the following steps Step Action 1 Use your company s computer backup process to back up the Gentran Server system before executing the archive process 2 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Archive System response The system displays the Archive Manager 3 Expand the archive tree and open the appropriate Definitions folder 4 Right click the appropriate archive definition and select Archive Data from the shortcut menu System response The system executes the archive process An interactive progress dialog box displays the current state of the archive process and enables you to cancel the archive if necessary The system archives the data by the parameters you specified and creating a new file in the Archives folder Naming convention The system naming convention for creating the archive files uses the same name of the archive definition file plus the unique date and time of archival with an ARV file extension 5 When the archive process is complete right click the appropriate Archive folder in the Archive Manager tree view and select Refres
357. verview 10 45 Procedure To restore archived data complete the following steps Step 1 Action From the appropriate area of The Desk select Archive System response The system displays the Archive Manager Expand the archive tree and locate the item that you want to restore Right click the item and select Mark Unmark from the shortcut menu System response The system flags that item for restoration Click Restore Data System response The marked data is restored to your system Note If the system is unable to restore data you are prompted to view the Audit Log for detailed information about why the failure occurred Use the following table to determine how to view the restored data IF the restored data was an THEN you can view the data in the interchange Restored Interchanges browser Reference See How to View Restored Interchanges for more information message Mailbox subsystem Reference See the Communications Guide for more information external data file External Data Summary viewer Reference See Viewing External Data Files on page 6 8 for more information Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 e Restored Interchanges Browser Using Archive and Restore 10 46 Restored Interchanges Browser Introduction The Restored Interchanges browser enables you to view a list of all interc
358. w Mailbox wizard which allows you to create a new mailbox Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Inbound Translation Object Dialog Box Using Partners 3 20 Part Function Recipient E mail Address Edit Mailbox Specify the e mail address to which the output of an inbound translation is delivered Or click Edit Mailbox to display the Create New Mailbox wizard which allows you to edit the mailbox Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Content Type SubType Specify the content type sub type of the message containing the output of the inbound translation Reference See the Communications User s Guide for more information Application ID Specify the application identifier that indicates the destination of the documents Application Alias Value Specify criteria for this relationship definition that is used during the application import function Example The application contains data that can generate either an invoice or a credit memo Use one relationship definition for invoices and another for credit memos There is a box in the application that defines whether this is an invoice or a credit memo The box will display CREDIT if a credit memo is created and INVOICE if an invoice is created Type CREDIT in the Application Alias Value for the
359. want to select a day or days of the week on which you want this session to be scheduled Ifyes click the check box next to those days and continue with Step 6 Ifno continue with Step 6 Note By default every day ofthe week is selected If any days are selected in this section then the schedule is executed only on those days If you select days from this section you cannot use the Date box Do you want to specify a day in which you want this session to run one time only fyes type that date in the Date box and continue with saving the event Ifno continue with saving the event Note This box enables you to specify a date on which this session should run one time only and then be removed from the database by the system If you type a date in this box you cannot select from the days of the week check boxes Format You can enter this date in any format but the sequence of the date you enter must correspond to the international Windows date formats for example in the United States dates must be entered in MM DD YY format and in the United Kingdom dates must be entered in DD MM Y Y Complete this section if the event is polled Click the Polled tab on the Event Setup dialog box System response The system displays the polled options In the File name box complete only one of the following Type the path and name of the file for which you want the system to check Cl
360. where you want to save the file Displays the current folder File name Specify the name of the file to be exported Note The Partner Name field is used to generate the file name If the Partner Name contains any Windows reserved characters V 2 lt gt the file drops those characters and pads the file name with spaces one space for each reserved character in the name Example If the Partner Name is AB CD TEST the file name will be AB CD TEST par Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Export File Build Dialog Box 3 80 Using Partners Part Function Save type Select the type of file Note The default file extension for partners is par Save Begins the export process Cancel Exits the dialog box without making a selection Help Displays Online Help Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Partner Copy Dialog Box Partner Copy Dialog Box Introduction Diagram Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f The partner copy feature allows you to copy partner information Once you copy the partner this dialog enables you to change the partner definition and other identifying boxes for the copied partner Note You must export the partner pr
361. with the EDI standard and are eligible for further processing NotOK All documents in the In Documents have this status This code indicates one of the following The document failed to comply with the EDI standard If this is the cause of the error the errors are indicated on a translator report associated with the document Despite the fact that the document is not fully compliant it is eligible for further processing The received document could not be associated with a specific trading partner If this is the case the partner listed for the document in question is Unknown To associate this document and the other documents received in the interchange with a partner attach the documents from the Interchanges browser A suitable trading relationship or translation object could not be associated with the document Detailed information concerning what information was used to locate the relationship and or the translation object is listed in the audit log To correct this problem a valid relationship must be established using the Partner Editor and a valid export print or turn around translation object must be defined for that relationship A major error occurred while processing the interchange functional group or transaction level enveloping structures This error may include header and trailer control numbers that do not match an invalid trailer control count or a control number sequence checking error If an
362. wledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Partners Outbound Interchange Entry Dialog Box 3 55 Part Function Acknowledge Select an Acknowledgement Build Map if one exists on the Transl Obj system You must select a translation object from the Acknowledge Transl Obj list if you have created a specific translation object for this relationship and if you want to change the way the system behaves for this partner interchange When the system reconciles an acknowledgement it maps the acknowledgement to an internal file and then processes it If you need the system to process acknowledgements differently you should select an additional translation object from the Acknowledge list Warning We strongly recommend that you do not change the translation objects in the Interchange Transl Obj and Acknowledge Transl Obj lists unless you have a specific reason for doing so Save Saves the modified information Exit Exits the Outbound Interchange Entry dialog box Envelope Accesses one of the following Outbound Interchange Envelope dialog boxes depending on which version you specified on the Outbound Relationship Dialog Box Outbound ISA Envelope Outbound ICS Envelope Outbound BG Envelope Outbound UNB Envelope Outbound UNA Envelope
363. work Status On Network Indicates that the interchange was successfully delivered to a value added network VAN To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 20 report in data format Network Warning Indicates that the interchange was delivered to a VAN which detected non critical errors in the data The data is available to be picked up by the designated trading partner To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 20 report in data format Network Error Indicates that the interchange was delivered to a VAN which detected critical errors in the data The data is not available to be picked up by the designated trading partner To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 20 report in data format Picked Up Indicates that the interchange was successfully delivered to a trading partner through a VAN To obtain this status using Sterling Information Broker you must have your mailbox configured to receive the 70 report in data format Transmitted to third party network Indicates that the interchange was transmitted to a third party network Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide GL 13 Interchange Group and Document Acknowledgement Status Waiting Ove
364. x to be restored Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Search Results Dialog Box 10 34 Using Archive and Restore Part Function Previous Selects the previous item in the list Note This button is only enabled if you select an archive file Next Selects the next item in the list Note This button is only enabled if you select an archive file Mark Unmark Flags the selected item to be restored or deselect a previously selected item Note This toggle button is only enabled if you select an archive file Help Accesses Online Help Close Exits Search Results dialog box Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 j Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Sort Preferences Dialog Box D 10 35 Sort Preferences Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Sort Preferences dialog box which enables you to select how you want the archive data sorted in the Archive tree view Diao O 8 x Select how you want your archives sorted in the display Cancel C By Filename How to access Select Preferences from the Archive menu Parts and The following lists the parts of the Sort Preferences dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Select how you want Select one of the following methods of sort order yo
365. xecutive Service checks if those interchanges are still in the queue Any that are still in the queue at the second system check are flagged to be sent during the next communications session To automatically resend outbound interchanges complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the Options menu select Preferences System response The system displays the Preferences dialog box 2 Click the Send Options tab 3 Click the box for Check for interchanges that did not send 4 Click OK 5 Optional Change the System Check Interval in the registry Default is 30 minutes 6 Restart services Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide j Using Interchanges Resending a specific interchange Resend process Resending Interchanges To resend a specific outbound interchange complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the appropriate area of The Desk select Interchanges System response The system displays the Interchanges Browser 2 Select the outbound interchange that needs to be resent 3 From the Document menu select Resend System response The system displays the Gentran Server for Windows dialog box 4 Click Yes to start the transmission session The following describes the system process that occurs when you resend an interchange Stage Description 1 When the resend command is executed
366. xternal Data Files 99 Filtering External Data Files Introduction When the External Data Summary viewer is active the Filter function enables you to filter the display of external data files by date and action Procedure To sort external data files by date and or action complete the following steps Step Action 1 From the View menu select External Data Browser System response The system displays the External Data Summary Viewer From the Commands menu select Filter System response The system displays the External Data Filter Dialog Box Do you want the system to filter the display of external data files by date and time Ifyes clear the No Date Time Checking check box and proceed with step 4 Ifno select the No Date Time Checking check box and proceed with step 6 Use the Date From slide bar to select the beginning date of a date range from which the system filters the display of external data files Do you want the end date for the date range to always be the current system date and time Ifyes select the Always Current check box Ifno clear the Always Current check box and move the Date to slide bar to the date and time you want to use Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Filtering External Data Files 6 10 Using External Data Step Action Do you want to fi
367. y of these errors occur they are listed on the translator report for the interchange containing the documents Interchanges The Interchanges browser contains graphics that represent the interchange process status interchange network status interchange group document acknowledgement status and document compliance status When you highlight an entry in the Interchanges browser an explanation of the status codes for that line is displayed in the Gentran Server status bar Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 GL 12 Interchange Process Status Received green Indicates that the interchange was received by the system Sent green Indicates that the interchange was successfully transmitted to the appropriate partner Ready to Send blue Indicates that an attempt was made to send this interchange but the communication session was not successful This interchange will be sent during the next appropriate communication session Queued Indicates that the document is queued to be sent Hold Indicates that the document is on hold not sent Overdue Indicates that the interchange is waiting to be reconciled with an inbound functional acknowledgement but has exceeded the number of hours by which that acknowledgement is deemed late Send Failed red Indicates that the send attempt failed due to an error during the communications process Interchange Net
368. you to export a partner profile Exit Exits the Partner Editor dialog box Edit Displays the Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box which allows you to change information about the selected partner New Displays the Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box which allows you to create a partner definition Delete Removes the selected partner profile from the system Inbound Displays the Inbound Relationship Dialog Box for the selected partner Outbound Displays the Outbound Relationship Dialog Box for the selected partner Tables Displays the Partner Tables Dialog Box for the selected partner Locations Displays the Location Select Dialog Box for the selected partner Refresh Refreshes the dialog box display Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 f j Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box Using Partners 3 8 Partner Definition New Edit Dialog Box Introduction The Partner Definition dialog box enables you to create a new partner definition or if you select a previously defined partner definition it allows you to edit it Diagram The following illustrates the Partner Definition New dialog box Profile ID i Name Exit EDI Code C Help Application Code Default Mailbox GENTRAN Application v New Mailbox Default NENNEN UE E mail Address Edit Mailbox Parts and The following lists the parts of the Partner
369. ys them in the Search Results Dialog Box Cancel Exits the dialog box Help Accesses Online Help Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 mms Document Search Dialog Box Using Archive and Restore 10 20 Document Search Dialog Box Diagram The following illustrates the Document Search dialog box Partner All hd Direction Both C Inbound C Outbound Control Number NEM Trans Id Ref Data Name Ack Status All Y E Cancel Help Parts and The following lists the parts of the Document Search dialog box and their functions functions Part Function Partner Select a partner profile ID default is All Direction Choose Both inbound and outbound Inbound or Outbound Control No Specify a control number Trans ID Specify a transaction identifier Ref Data Specify the reference data from the translation object Name Specify the document name established for the translation object Continued on next page Gentran Server for Windows November 2005 Gentran Server for Windows User s Guide Using Archive and Restore Document Search Dialog Box DJ 10 21 Part Function Ack Status Select the acknowledgement status of the documents to search for Valid values All default Received ReconcileWaiting ReconciledOK ReconciledErrors ReconciledPartial ReconciledReject

GenTran Webcam 5.1 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents